HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 3536 - Contract - Danny Klein Construction - Office Additions, Land Application Site - 01_24_1991Resolution No.'3536
January 24, 1991
Item #30
HW:js
RESOLUTION
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and
directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract by and
between the City of Lubbock and Danny Klein Construction for Land Application
Office Additions at land application site, attached herewith, which shall be
spread upon the minutes of the Council and as spread upon the minutes of this
Council shall constitute and be a part of this Resolution as if fully copied
herein in detail.
Passed by the City Council this 24th
ATTEST:
anette boya, u,ty secretary
APPROVED AS TO CONTENT:
urcnasing Manager
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
IlAp-
Harold Willard, sAssista t City
Attorney
day of January , 1991.
B. C. McMIN , MAYOR
235��
CHANGE ORDER NUMBER ONE
BID NUMBER 11049
TO: Danny Klein Construction
4310 93rd Street
Lubbock, Texas 79423
Original Amount of Contract
Amount Previous Change Orders.
Net Amount this Change Order
Amended Amount of Contract
Percentage Change of Contract Price is 3%
Additional Time of Completion is 0 Days
The Date of Substantial Completion as of
this Change Order is June 6, 1991
$ 53,260.00
.00
1,578.50
$ 54,838.50
WHEREAS, it is desirable to make changes in the plans and specifications for
this project.
THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSED: The Contractor to furnish all labor and material to
replace existing roofing.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Owner and the Contractor have hereto set their hands
this the 28 day of May, 1991.
CONTRACTOR:
Danny Klein Construction
BY: ) �/ �..
In
TITLE
�`�
Attorney
OWNER:
City fof Lubbock
BY: WOAO1
Deputy City Manager
APP VED.AS TO CONTENT:
Q�
recce r of Building Services
CHANGE ORDER NUMBER TWO
BID NUMBER 11049
TO: Danny Klein Construction
4310 93rd Street
Lubbock, Texas 79423
Original Amount of Contract
Amount Previous Change Orders
Net Amount this Change Order
Amended Amount of Contract
Percentage Change of Contract Price is 9%
Additional Time of Completion is 0 Days
The Date of Substantial Completion as of
this Change Order is June 6, 1991
53,260.00
1,578.50
4,750.40
59,588.90
WHEREAS, it is desirable to make changes in the plans and specifications for
this project.
THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSED: The Contractor to furnish all labor and material to
make changes as per attached Exhibit A dated May 20, 1991.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Owner and the Contractor have hereto set their hands
this the 28 day of May, 1991.
CONTRACTOR:
Danny Kl in Constructiioon /
BY:
TITLE
OWNER:
City of Lubbock
BY:
Deputy City Manager
APPROVED AS TO FORM: APP OVED AS TO CONTENT:
Ci Atto ey ire or of Building Services
EXHIBIT A
CHANGE ORDER #2
LAND APPLICATIONS OFFICE
BID #11049
Replace existing carpet
Paint existing trim and wrought iron
Addition - electrical panel upgrade
Wall repair
Additional locks, pulls, and corner mold
Replace entrance door
Credit for A/C unit
O/H & Profit
Additional Bond
SUB -TOTAL
SUB -TOTAL
TOTAL
$ 1,501.50
1,250.00
820.00
110.00
534.00
495.00
$ 4,710.50
-500.00
$ 4,210.50
421.05
$ 4,631.55
118.85
$ 4,750.40
CHANGE ORDER NUMBER THREE
BID NUMBER 11049
TO: Danny Klein Construction
4310 93rd Street
Lubbock, Texas 79423
Original Amount of Contract
Amount Previous Change Orders
Net Amount this Change Order
Amended Amount of Contract
Percentage Change of Contract Price is 1.2%
Additional Time of Completion is 0 Days
The Date of Substantial Completion as of
this Change Order is June 6, 1991
$ 53,260.00
6,328.90
649.00
$ 60,237.90
WHEREAS, it is desirable to make changes in the plans and specifications for
this project.
THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSED: The Contractor to furnish all labor and material
for additional cabinet hardware and 3/4" water line.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Owner and the Contractor have hereto set their, hands
this the 5 day of June, 1991.
CONTRACTOR:
Danny K1 i
BY:
TITLE
AP DD OVED AS TO FORM:
i
C y At o ney
A55�'
OWNER:
City of Lubbock
BY:
Deputy City Manager
APP VED AS TO CONTENT:
rec of Building Services
T
ITY OF' LUFIDOCK
S P F If r- A T 10 %143.
1-OR
.Pyl) I.` 1 .1049
CITY OF LUBBOCK
Lubbock, Texas ,,PSwA
CITY OF LU89OCK
SPECIFICATIONS
for
TITLE: LAND APPLICATION OFFICE ADDITION
ADDRESS: EAST 19TH STREET
BID NUMBER: 11049
PROJECT NUMBER: 2133-552101-9650
CONTRACT PREPARED BY: Purchasing Department
-1-
(THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
INDEX
PAGE
NOTICETO BIDDERS..........................................................................................3
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS............................................................................4
BID PROPOSAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS.................................................................10
PAYMENTBOND..............................................................................................13
PERFORMANCEBOND..........................................................................................16
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE.............................................................. ............19
CONTRACT..................................................................................................21
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT.......................................................................23
CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS...............................................................................41
SPECIFICATIONS................................................................ .................. ....42
SPECIALCONDITIONS ...................... :................................................................. 43
NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE......................................................................................45
-2-
(THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY)
I-
0-
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
-3-
(THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY)
R.aa
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
BID # 11049
Sealed proposals addressed to Gene Eads, C.P.M., Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be
received at the office of the Purchasing Manager, 1625 13th St., Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until
f" 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 28th day of December, 1990, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all
planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following
described project:
LAND APPLICATION OFFICE ADDITIONS
After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed proposals will be opened
by the Purchasing Manager at his office and publicly read aloud.
It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of Gene
Eads, Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written.
The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 10th day of January, 1991, at Municipal Bldg.,
Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or
all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond
and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., in the amount of 100% of the
total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. Said statutory bonds should
be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior, as the rating of the bond company is
a factor that will be considered in determination of the lowest responsible bidder. if the contract price
does not exceed $25,000.00 the said statutory bonds will not be required.
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a
cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a
reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less
than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and
execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him.
It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself
regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. it shall be understood and agreed that
all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted.
The plans, specifications, proposal forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of
the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, Texas.
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per
diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of
Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is
further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained
therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as
heretofore established by owner in said wage scale.
The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant
to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to
submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race,
color, sex, or national origin in consideration for an award.
There will be a pre -bid conference on 17th day of December, 1990, at 10:OO o'clock a.m., Personnel
Conference Room #108, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street.
CITY OF LUBBOCK
BY: Gene Eads, C.P.M.
Purchasing Manager
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
-4-
(THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY)
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
BID # 11049
sealed proposals addressed to Gene Eads, C.P.M., Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be
received at the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock,
- Texas, 79401 until 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 28th day of December, 1990, or as changed by the issuance of
formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the
construction of the following described project:
LAND APPLICATION OFFICE ADDITIONS
After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed proposals will be opened
by the Purchasing Manager at his office and publicly read aloud.
The plans, specifications, proposal forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of
the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, Texas.
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the Schedule of General Prevailing Rate of Per
Diem Wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of
Lubbock, Texas. Each bidder's attention is further directed to the provisions of Article 5159a, Vernon's
Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning such wage scales and payment by the
contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by the City of Lubbock.
The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant
to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to
submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race,
color, sex, or national origin in consideration for an award.
There will be a prebid conference on 17th day of December, 1990, at 10:00 o'clock a.m., Conference
Personnel Room #108, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street.
BY: Gene Eads, C.P.M.
PURCHASING MANAGER
(THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY)
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. SCOPE OF WORK
The work to be done under the contract documents shall consist of the following:
'"- Remodeling of interior and exterior of Land Application Office Addition.
The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to
.. complete this project in accordance with contract documents.
2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the Gen-
eral Conditions.
All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents
for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work
contemplated by said contract documents.
3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS
It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project
covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a
bid without charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as
noted in the Notice to Bidders.
4. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION
The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 90 (NINETY) calendar days
from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder.
The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however,
the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated
by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is
determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so sub-
^, mitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure comple-
tion of the project within the time specified.
5. PAYMENT
All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of
the contract documents.
6. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID
The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor
to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of
the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims
pending, of which the Contractor has been notified.
-5-
7. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade -
will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail
will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for pro-
tecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of
the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provi-
sion. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum
standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project.
8. GUARANTEES
All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against de- _
fective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a
written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and
pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear
within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship,
at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock).
9. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR
The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his
use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished di-
rectly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to sup-
pliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Con-
tractor.
10. PROTECTION OF THE WORK
The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materi-
als, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construc-
tion, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid
for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City re-
serves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a
bidder the following information:
(a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by -
the proposed contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed.
(b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder.
(c) Equipment schedule.
11. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX
This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions
of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act.
The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the ma-
terials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase.
-6-
.--
12. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in
such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines,
conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construc-
tion of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will fur-
nish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. How-
ever, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such under-
ground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by
this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas,
at Contractor's expense.
13. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES
The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger sig-
nals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work
'-' as may be necessary.
The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and
Lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and re-
placed by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barri-
cades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of
acceptance of the project.
14. EXPLOSIVES
The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor
from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor
shall assume full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blast-
ing. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost
care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are
currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity.
Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor.
In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this
contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or
below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such
notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem
necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations.
15. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE
The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times
while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the
name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the
work contemplated by this contract is in progress.
lb. INSURANCE
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required
in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the
State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written
-7-
notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or
change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subroga-
tion.
The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured and shall further state
that all subcontractors are named as additional insureds, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a
statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted.
17. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages
included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less
than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The
bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil
Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations there-
under. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract docu-
ments does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construc-
tion work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless
the following conditions exist:
(1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary
service to its citizens.
(2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is
approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent
effort to complete the contract within the allotted time.
Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor
must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday
he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The
final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be
made by the Owner's Representative.
In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done
under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately
commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition
so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life.
18. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS
The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project
under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without
discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the
site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's
Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name
of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The
affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deduc-
tions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon.
The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of
general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents.
-8-
The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten
dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such
laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set
forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents.
19. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATOR CLAUSES
Proposals submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to in-
creases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be re-
jected and returned to the bidder without being considered.
20. PREPARATION FOR PROPOSAL
The bidder shall submit his proposal on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be
correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he proposes
to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, dis-
tinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the
price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If the proposal is submitted by an indi-
vidual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a proposal is submitted by a firm,
association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the proposal signed by a
member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the proposal is submitted by
a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the proposal
signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign
proposals must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. The proposal
shall be executed in ink.
.� Each proposal shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and
endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner:
(a) Bidder's name
(b) Proposal for (description of the project).
Bid proposals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids,
but no proposal may be withdrawn or altered thereafter.
21. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the fol-
lowing:
(a) Notice to Bidders.
(b) General Instructions to Bidders.
(c) Bidder's Proposal.
(d) Statutory Bond (if required).
(a) Contract Agreement.
(f) General Conditions.
(g) Special Conditions (if any).
(h) Specifications.
(i) Insurance Certificates.
(j) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to
Bidders.
if Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered
,..� incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents.
-9-
(THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY)
r
BID PROPOSAL
-10-
(THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY)
BID PROPOSAL
BID FOR LUMP SUN CONTRACTS
PLACE Lubbock
DATE 12-28-90
PROJECT RO. 3-552101-9650.
Proposal, of Danny Klein. Construction (hereinafter called Bidder)
y..v�. k A .:..} .. r..:...
'.,_,To 'the Nonorable''Mayor and City'Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner)
Gentlemen:
The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a Land Application Office Addn.
having carefully examined the plans, specifications., instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other re-
lated contract documents and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surround-
ing the construction of the proposed project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to
furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifica-
tions and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover
all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents, of which this proposal is to be
a part, is as follows:
BID., Fifty-one Thousand Four Hundred Eighty 'and no/100 _ ($51, 480. 00 l
ALTERNATEN 1: One Thousand Seven Hundred Eighty and no/100_cs 1,780.00 ) �:
(ADD) Painting of existing interior painted surfaces as indicated on drawing.
Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) '
Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a
written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 90 (NINETY) consecutive calendar
.� days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to
pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sun of $100.00 (One Hundred dollars) for each consecutive calendar day in
excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general
conditions of the contract documents.
Bidder understands and agrees that this bid proposal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with in-
struction number 20 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
Bidder understands that the owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in
the bidding.
The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar
days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids
m-^ The undersigned Bidder hereby. declares that•he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined
the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees
-11-
to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the
work on which he has bid; as provided in -the contract documents.
Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Twenty—seven Hundred Fifty
Dollars (s 2, 750.0g or a Proposal Bond in the sum of Dollars (s ),
which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the owner as liquidated damages in the event the proposal is
accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond
(if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said
proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand.
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all con-
tract documents made available.to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
Danny Klein Construction
Contract
BY:
Danny K1 ' n
(Seal if Bidder is a Corporation)
ATTEST
Secretary
-12-
r-
PAYMENT BOND
-13-
(THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY)
BOND CHECK
BEST RATING±
TEAS STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND ""NEED I TEXpS
(PUBLIC WORKS) DATE $
KNOW ALL 4EN BY THESE PRESENTS, That Danny Klein Construction,
Lubbock, Texas
(hereinafter called the Principal), as principal, and Hartford Casualty Insurance
Company , a corporation organized and existing under t::e laws of
the State of Indiana , licensed to do business in the State of Texas and
admitted to write bonas, as surety, (hereinafter called the Surety,, are held
and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock
(hereinafter called the Obligee, in the amount of Fifty-three Thousand
Two Hundred Sixty and nO/100******* ;Dollarsi
($ 53,260.00 ) for she payment wnereof, the said Principal :and Surety
bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and
assigns,. jointly and severally, firmly by these presents:
WHEREAS, the Principai has entered into a certain contrac: -,.ith the
Obligee, datea the 24th day of January 19 91 for
Rid 411049- Land Application Office Addition
which contract is hereby rererrea to and made a part hereof as r;:._ana to
the same extent as if copied at length herein.
NOW, HEREFORE, THE °-_NDITION of THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, !,.at if the
said Principal :nail pay ail riaimants supplying labor and material _o him or
a subccntract=r in the prosecution of the work provided for in saic _-ontract,
then, .nis _..._cation snail Ze nuil and void; otherwise to remain 1.n full
force ana effect;
HOWEVER, that .his pond is executed pursuant to the provisions
w- of Artic:.a 5:3-0 of the Revisea Civil Statutes of Texas ana all lianr:ities on
this bona --nail be determinea in accordance with the provisions,=.-naitiona
and lim.itatrcns of said Article to the game extent as if it were copied at
,= length herein.
I.1 WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signeu ana seaiea
this instrument this 25th-lav of February 19 9 1
PRINCIPAL: Danny Klein Construction
BY: 'd
'
Danny Klein
(SEALI
SURETY: Hartford Casualty Insurance.Cc�+.nry
�. B C (J
,i
Attorney-In-r'act
William D. Baldwin
ai
HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY
EXECUTIVE OFFICE: Hartford, Connecticut
POWER OF ATTORNEY
Know all men by these Presents, That the HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY, a
corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana, and having its Executive Office in the City of
Hartford, County of Hartford, State of Connecticut, does hereby make, constitute and appoint
WILLIAM D. BALDWIN of RICHARDSON, TEXAS
its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fad, with full power and authority to each of said Attorney(s)-in-Fact, in their separate
capacity if more than one is named above, to sign, execute and acknowledge any and all bonds and undertakings and other
writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Company in its business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons
holding places of public or private trust; guaranteeing the performance of contracts other than insurance policies;
guaranteeing the performance of insurance contracts where surety bonds are accepted by states and municipalities, and
executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in all actions or proceedings or by law allowed,
and to bind the HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bonds
and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof were signed by an Executive Officer of the HARTFORD
CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY and sealed and attested by one other of such Officers, and hereby ratifies and
confirms all that its said Attomey(s)-in-Fact may do in pursuance hereof.
This power of attorney is granted under and by authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Board of Directors
of the HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 15th day of June, 1988.
RESOLVED. that, the President or any Vice -President, acting with any Secretary or Assistant Secretary, shall have power and authority to
appoint, for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, one or more
Resident Vice -Presidents, Resident Assistant Secretaries and Attorneys -in -Fact and at any time to remove any such Resident Vice -President,
Resident Assistant Secretary, or Attorney -on -Fact, and revoke the power and authority given to him.
„^ Attorneys -in -Fact shall have power and authority, subject to the terms and limitations of the power of attorney issued to them, to execute
and deliver on behalf of the Company and to attach the seal of the Company thereto any and all bonds and undertakings, and other writings
obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such instrument executed by any such Attorney -in -Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if
signed by an Executive Officer and sealed and attested by one other of such Officers.
RESOLVED, that, Robert N. H. Sener, Assistant Vice -President, shall have, as long as he holds such office, the same powers as any Vice -
President pursuant to the preceding Resolution. .
RESOLVED. that, whereas the President or any Vice -President, acting with any Secretary or Assistant Secretary, has the power and
authority to appoint by a power of attorney, for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings, and other writings obligatory
in the nature thereof, one or more Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Secretaries and Attorneys -in -Fact.
Now therefore, the signatures of such Officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such power of attorney or to any
certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such power of attomey or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be
valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by facsimile signatures and facsimile seal shall be valid
and binding upon the Company in the future with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached.
RESOLVED, that, Robert N. H. Sener, Assistant Vice -President, may, as long as he holds such office, affix his signature by facsimile
pursuant too and with the same effect as that granted to Vice -Presidents under the preceding Resolution.
In Witness Whereof, the HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY has caused these presents to be
m., signed by its Assistant Vice -President, and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed, duly attested by its Secretary,
this 1st day of March, 1988.
HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY
Attest:
Robert J. Mathieu Robert N. H. Sener
Secretary Assistant Vice -President
STATE OF CONNECTICUT,
ss.
COUNTY OF HARTFORD,
On this 18th day of March, A.D. 1988, before me personally came Robert N. H. Sener, to me known, who being by
me duly sworn, did depose and say: that he resides in the County of Hartford, State of Connecticut; that he is the
Assistant Vice -President of the HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY, the corporation described in and
which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to the said
instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation and ,
that he signed his'name thereto by like order.
Jacqueline T. Desrosiers,
STATE OF CONNECTICUT, Q Notary Public
ss. - My Commission Expires April 1, 1993
COUNTY OF HARTFORD, CERTIFICATE
I, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of the HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY, an lnrj;ana ?
Corporation, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing and attached POWER OF ATTORNEY remains in full force
and has not been revoked; and furthermore, that the Resolutions of the Board of Directors, set forth in the Pourer J .
of Attorney, are now in force. t `
Signed and sealed at the City of Hartford. Date the Z 5T 14 day of FIE uA-Ky 19
r i..
David A. Johnson / )
Form S-U073 (HC) Printed in U.S.A. „!l Assistant Secretary
PERFORMANCE BOND
-16-
(THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY)
TEXAS STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND
(PUBLIC WORKS)
BOND CHECK
BEST RATING e 1L
LICENSE I TEXAS
DATE g
P-' KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That Danny Klein Construction
Lubbock, Texas
(hereinafter called the Principal), as principal, and Hartford Casualty IIn_surance
Company a corporation organized and existing under the laws
of the State of Indiana licensed to do business in the State of Texas
and admitted to write bonds, as surety, (hereinafter called the Surety), are
held and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock Texas
(hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of Fifty-three Thousand Two
Hundred Sixty and no/100***** (Doilarsi
($ 5'1 6n-nn ) for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety
bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and
assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents:
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain contract with the
Obligee, dated the 24th day of January 19 91 for Bid #11049
Land Application Office Addition
which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to
the same extent as if copiea at length herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGnTION IS SUCH, That if the
said Principal shall faithfully perform the work :n accordance with the plans,
specificaricns and contract documents, than this obligation shall be nuil and
-- void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect;
PROVI:ED, HOWEVER, that :his bond is executed pursuant to the provisions
of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas and all Liabilities on
this bona shall be determined in accordance with the provisions, conditions
and limitations of said Articie to the same extent as- if it were copied at
length herein.
III WI TESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed
this instrument this 25th day of February 1.q,g 1
PRINCIPAL: Danny Klein Construction
B
Y•
[SEAL) Danny Klein
SURETY: Hartford Casualty Insurance Company
y, L ,
Attotney-in-Fa t,
William'D. Ballwin
HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY
EXECUTIVE OFFICE: Hartford. Connecticut
POWER OF ATTORNEY
Know all men by these Presents, That the HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY, a
corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana, and having its Executive Office in the City of
Hartford, County of Hartford, State of Connecticut, does hereby make, constitute and appoint
WILLIAM D. BALDWIN of RICHARDSON, TEXAS
its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact, with full power and authority to each of said Attorneys) -in -Fact, in their separate
capacity if more than one is named above, to sign, execute and acknowledge any and all bonds and undertakings and other
writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Company in its business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons
holding places of public or private trust; guaranteeing the performance of contracts other than insurance policies;
guaranteeing the performance of insurance contracts where surety bonds are accepted by states and municipalities, and
executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in all actions or proceedings or by law allowed,
and to bind the HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bonds
and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof were signed by an Executive Officer of the HARTFORD
CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY and sealed and attested by one other of such Officers, and hereby ratifies and
confirms all that its said Attomey(s)-in-Fact may do in pursuance hereof.
This power of attorney is granted under and by authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Board of Directors
of the HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 15th day of June, 1988.
RESOLVED. that, the President or any Vice -President, acting with any Secretary or Assistant Secretary, shall have power and authority to
appoint, for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, one or more
Resident Vice -Presidents. Resident Assistant Secretaries and Attorneys -in -Fact and at any time to remove any such Resident Vice -President,
Resident Assistant Secretary, or Attorney -in -Fact, and revoke the power and authority given to him.
Attorneys -in -Fact shall have power and authority, subject to the terms and limitations of the power of attorney issued to them. to execute
^ and deliver on behalf of the Company and to attach the seal of the Company thereto any and all bonds and undertakings, and other writings
obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such instrument executed by any such Attorney -in -Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if
signed by an Executive Officer and sealed and attested by one other of such Officers.
RESOLVED, that, Robert N. H. Sener. Assistant Vice -President, shall have, as long as he holds such office, the same powers as any Vice -
President pursuant to the preceding Resolution. .
r— RESOLVED, that, whereas the President or any Vice -President, acting with any Secretary or Assistant Secretary, has the power and
authority to appoint by a power of attorney, for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings, and other writings obligatory
in the nature thereof, one or more Resident Vice -(residents, Assistant Secretaries and Attorneys -in -Fact.
Now therefore, the signatures of such Officers and the seat of the Company may be affixed to any such power of attorney or to any
certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be
valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by facsimile signatures and facsimile seal shall be valid
and binding upon the Company in the future with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached.
RESOLVED, that, Robert N. H. Sener, Assistant Vice -President, may, as long as he holds such office, affix his signature by facsimile
pursuant too and with the same effect as that granted to Vice -Presidents under the preceding Resolution.
In Witness Whereof, the HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY has caused these presents to be
signed by its Assistant Vice -President, and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed, duly attested by its Secretary,
this 1st day of March, 1988.
HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY
Attest:
Robert J. Mathieu Robert N. H. Sener
Secretary Assistant Vice -President
STATE OF CONNECTICUT,
COUNTY OF HARTFORD,
On this 18th day of March, A.D. 1988, before me personally came Robert N. H. Sener, to me known, who being by
me duly sworn, did depose and say: that he resides in the County of Hartford, State of Connecticut; that he is the
Assistant Vice -President of the HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY, the corporation described in and
which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to the said
instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation and ,
^^ that he signed his'name thereto by like order. aN -\
STATE OF CONNECTICUT, jJacqueline T. oesmsiers, Notary Pubtic.•' ..� ?�� , 1 t'
SS. My Commission Expires April 1, 1993',
COUNTY OF HARTFORD, CERTIFICATE
1, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary -of the HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY, an tnd;�na >
Corporation, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing and attached POWER OF ATTORNEY remains in full force .5
and has not been revoked; and furthermore, that the Resolutions of the Board of Directors, set forth in the Power z)
of Attorney, are now in force.
Signed and sealed at the City of Hartford. Date the Z -5'r� day of FFIEy `/ 19
�f
David A. Johnson -
Form S-3507-S (MC) Printed in U.S.A. ;:, w �: Assistant Secretary
r
0- -
1-
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
-19-
(THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY)
- HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY
EXECUTIVE OFFICE: Hartford, Connecticut
POWER OF ATTORNEY
Know all men by these Presents, That the HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY, a
corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana, and having its Executive Office in the City of
Hartford. County of Hartford, State of Connecticut, does hereby make, constitute and appoint
WILLIAM D. BALDWIN of RICHARDSON, TEXAS
its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact, with full power and authority to each of said Attomey(s)-in-Fact, in their separate
capacity if more than one is named above, to sign, execute and acknowledge any and all bonds and undertakings and other
writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Company in its business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons
holding places of public or private trust; guaranteeing the performance of contracts other than insurance policies;
guaranteeing the performance of insurance contracts where surety bonds are accepted by states and municipalities, and
executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in all actions or proceedings or by law allowed,
and to bind the HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bonds
and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof were signed by an Executive Officer of the HARTFORD
CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY and sealed and attested by one other of such Officers, and hereby ratifies and
confirms all that its said Attomey(s)-in-Fact may do in pursuance hereof.
This power of attorney is granted under and by authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Board of Directors
of the HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 15th day of June, 1988.
RESOLVED, that, the President or any Vice -President, acting with any Secretary or Assistant Secretary, shall have power and authority to
appoint, for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, one or more
Resident Vice -Presidents, Resident Assistant Secretaries and Attorneys -in -Fact and at any time to remove any such Resident Vice -President,
Resident Assistant Secretary, or Attorney -in -Fad, and revoke the power and authority given to him.
,,.. Attorneys -in -Fad shall have power and authority, subject to the terms and limitations of the power of attorney issued to them. to execute
and deliver on behalf of the Company and to attach the seal of the Company thereto any and all bonds and undertakings, and other writings
obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such instrument executed by any such Attorney -in -Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if
signed by an Executive Officer and sealed and attested by one other of such Officers.
RESOLVED, that, Robert N. H. Sener, Assistant Vice -President, shall have, as long as he holds such office, the same powers as any Vice -
President pursuant to the preceding Resolution. .
RESOLVED, that, whereas the President or any Vice -President, acting with any Secretary or Assistant Secretary, has the power and
authority to appoint by a power of attorney. for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings, and other writings obligatory
in the nature thereof. one or more Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Secretaries and Attorneys -in -Fact.
Now therefore, the signatures of such Officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such power of attorney or to any
certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be
valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by facsimile signatures and facsimile seal shall be valid
r - and binding upon the Company in the future with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached.
RESOLVED, that. Robert N. H. Sener, Assistant Vice -President, may, as long as he holds such office, affix his signature by facsimile
pursuant too and with the same effect as that granted to Vice -Presidents under the preceding Resolution.
In Witness Whereof, the HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY has caused these presents to be
--. signed by its Assistant Vice -President, and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed, duly attested by its Secretary,
this 1st day of March, 1988.
HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY
Attest:
Robert J. Mathieu Robert N. H. Sener
Secretary Assistant Vice -President
STATE OF CONNECTICUT, j
} SS.
COUNTY OF HARTFORD,
On this 18th day of March, A.D. 1988, before me personally came Robert N. H. Sener, to me known, who being by
me duly sworn, did depose and say: that he resides in the County of Hartford, State of Connecticut; that he is the
Assistant Vice -President of the HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY, the corporation described in and
which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to the said
instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board o/ Directors of said corporation and .
that he signed his'name thereto by like order.
STATE OF CONNECTICUT, l �� �j Jacqueline T. Disarmers, Notary Public, :� C
)j SS. �� My Commission Expires April 1, 1993
COUNTY OF HARTFORD, CERTIFICATE c
I, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of the HARTFORD CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY, an Indt4na ' .J
Corporation, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing and attached POWER OF ATTORNEY remains in full rdree .� >
and has not been revoked; and furthermore, that the Resolutions of the Board of Directors, set forth in the PoJyer
--a of Attorney, are now in force. ? `
Signed and sealed at the City of Hartford. Date the 2- 15T e day of FIE`u /jay
��,eiuG
Form S-J507-5 (HC) Printed in U.S.A. .. s, David A. Johnson ! )<
., t` Assistant Secretary
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
this is to certify that ❑ STATE FARM FIRE AND CASUALTY COMPANY, Bloomington, Illinois
❑ STATE FARM GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, Bloomington, Illinois
Q STATE FARM LLOYDS, Dallas, Texas
has in force for
^ ame o ol,cy o er
4310 93rrd LUBBOCK,TX 79414
Address of Policyholder -
n
location of operations—,T,lt}p}e
the following coverages for the periods and limits indicated below.
POLICY NUMBER
TYPE OF INSURANCE
POLICY PERIOD
(efLlexp.)
LIMITS OF LIABILITY
(at beginning of policy period)
9� Commercial
2-1-91/ 2-1-92
BODILY INJURY AND
General Liability
PROPERTY DAMAGE
Each Occurrence $ 500,000
The above insurance Products —Completed Operations
includes: (applicable ❑ Personal Injury
„ if indicated by ®)
General Aggregate $ crvt rY1n /1,000,000
,
❑ Contractual Liability
❑ Advertising and Personal Injury
Products —Completed
Operations Aggregate $ inn rnn
❑ Underground Property Damage
❑ Explosion and Collapse Property Damage
POLICY NUMBER
TYPE OF INSURANCE
POLICY PERIOD
(eff.lexp.)
LIMITS OF LIABILITY
(at beginning of policy period)
Workmen's/Workers'
new 1SSUe
Xg Compensation —
Coverage A
2-1-91/2-1-92
Coverage A STATUTORY
Employer's Liability —
Coverage B $ inn nrn
g ,
Coverage B
PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY
❑ Professional
Each Claim $
Liability
Aggregate $
Excess Liability
BODILY INJURY AND
❑ Combined Single Limit for: PROPERTY DAMAGE
❑ Umbrella
Each Occurrence $
❑ Other
Aggregate $
R25 9702F06
f alto
12-6-90/6-6-91
100/300/100
THE CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE IS NOT A CONTRACT OF INSURANCE AND NEITHER AFFIRMATIVELY NOR NEGATIVELY AMENDS,
EXTENDS OR ALTERS THE COVERAGE APPROVED BY ANY POLICY DESCRIBED HEREIN.
Name and Address of Party to Whom Certificate is Issued
CITY OF LUBBOCK
PO BOX 2000
LUBBOCK,TX 79408
LAND APPLICATION OFFICE ADDITION
558-994 TX 2-88
• 2-20-91
Date
Signature of Ath<64C6d Representative
agent
Title
(This page left blank intentionally)
CONTRACT
-21-
(THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY)
0
CONTRACT
STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF LUBBOCK
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 24th day of January. 1991, by and between the City of Lubbock,
County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through B.C. McMinn, Mayor, thereunto authorized to do so,
hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and DANNY KLEIN CONSTRUCTION of the City of LUBBOCK, County of LUB80CK and the
State of TEXAS, hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR.
WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and
performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CON-
TRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as fol-
lows:
BID #11049 - LAND APPLICATION OFFICE ADDITIONS IN THE AMOUNT OF $53,260.00.
and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or
their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence,
labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with
the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement.
The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have
been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents.
The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with
the proposal submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to
make payment on account thereof as provided therein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County,
Texas in the year and day first above written.
T �
Sec etary
APPROVED AS TO CONTENT:
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
,17
��
ATTEST:
Corporate Secretary
CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS (OWNER)
WER)
By: 07 C i /0//
AYO
DANNY KLEIN CONSTRUCTION
CONTRACTO
By:
TITLE:
COMPLETE ADDRESS:
4310 93RD STREET
Lubbock, TX 79423
-22-
(THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY)
• h
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
-23-
(THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY)
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
1. OWNER
Whenever the word Owner, or the expression Party of the First Part, or First Party, are used in this con-
tract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas.
2. CONTRACTOR
Whenever the word Contractor, or the expression Party of the Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall
be understood to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corporation, to -wit: DANNY KLEIN CONSTRUCTION
who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or to his or their legai representative.
3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood
as referring to JERRY SMITH, DIRECTOR OF BUILDING SERVICES, City of Lubbock, under whose supervision these
contract documents, including the plans and specifications, were prepared, and who will inspect construc-
tions; or to such other representative, supervisor, or inspector as may be authorized by said Owner to act
in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisor or inspectors will act for the Owner under
the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or men acting in
behalf of the Contractor.
4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The contract documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Proposal,
Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of
the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available
to Bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES
Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed,"
or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order,
designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved,"
�--. "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory
to the Owner's Representative.
Whenever in the Specifications or drawings accompanying this agreement, the terms of description of various
qualities relative to finish, workmanship, or other qualities of similar kind which cannot, from their na-
ture, be specifically and clearly described and specified, but are necessarily described in general terms.
the fulfillment of which must depend on individual judgment, then, in all such cases, any question of the
^� fulfillment of said Specifications shall be decided by the Owner's Representative, and said work shall be
done in accordance with his interpretations of the meaning of the words, terms, or clauses defining the
character of the work.
6. SUBCONTRACTOR
The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor
for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no re-
sponsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated
by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments
due Subcontractor.
-24-
7. WRITTEN NOTICE
Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a
member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent
certified mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice.
8. WORK
Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery,
equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and
all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract docu-
ments. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be
of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and
quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or
trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards.
All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents.
9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED
The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract docu-
ments has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended
purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment.
10. LAYOUT
Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and
shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative
will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor
at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly
Locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE
The Contractor shall be furnished with one copies of all Plans, Profiles and Specifications without expense
to him and he shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site.
12. RIGHT OF ENTRY
The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress of quality of the
executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract docu-
ments. He will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check the quality or
quantity of the work, nor will he be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences
or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. His efforts will be directed towards providing
assurances for the Owner that the completed project will conform to the requirements of the contract docu-
ments, but he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with
the Contract Documents. On the basis of his on -site observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the
progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work of
the Contractor.
-25-
rr
13. LINES AND GRADES
All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever necessary for the commence-
ment of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by
these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend his work in order to permit owner's
Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Con-
tractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Repre-
sentative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks,
etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by him,
his Subcontractors, or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representa-
tive at Contractor's expense.
14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY
Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's
Representative shall review all work included herein. He has the authority to stop the work whenever such
stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. In order to permit delays and
disputes and to discourage litigation, it is further agreed that the Owner's Representative shall, in all
cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under this
.-. contract. He shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and
shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the
part of said Contractor. The Owner's Representative's estimates and findings shall be conditions precedent
to the right of the parties hereto to arbitration or to any action on the contract, and to any rights of the
Contractor to receive any money under this contract; provided, however, that should Owner's Representative
render any decision or give any direction, which in the opinion of either party hereto, is not in accordance
with the meaning and intent of this contract, either party may file with said Owner's Representative within
30 days his written objection to the decision or direction so rendered, and by such action may reserve the
right to submit the questions so raised to arbitration as hereinafter provided. It is the intent of this
Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the work, therefore, written decisions or direc-
tion of the Owner's Representative as rendered shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising there-
from shall be thereafter adjusted to arbitration as hereinafter provided.
The Owner's Representative shall, within a reasonable time, render and deliver to both the Owner and the
Contractor a written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise rela-
tive to the execution of the work or the interpretation of the contract, specifications and plans. Should
the Owner's Representative fail to make such decision within a reasonable time, an appeal to arbitration may
be taken as if his decision had been rendered against the party appealing.
15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION
It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint
from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative
may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that
.— said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Con-
tractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors
or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey
r�
the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when
such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying
plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate
engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within six (6) days make written appeal to the Owner's
Representative for his decision.
-26-
16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE
The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and
shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all
satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence
and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by
competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the
work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor.
The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Con-
tractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Owner or Owner's Representatives will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or
any subcontractors, or any of his agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work.
17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the na-
ture and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of mate-
rials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the
prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way effect
the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of
the owner, either before or after the execution of this contract, shall effect or modify any of the terms or
obligations herein contained.
18. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN
The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of
work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall
inform him in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or dis-
orderly, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work with-
out the Owner's Representative's written consent.
19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT
The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecu-
tion and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that owner shall fur-
nish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation,
conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it
is finally completed and accepted.
The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the
Owner's Representative shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure
shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative.
20. SANITATION
Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public ob-
servation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall
be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced.
-27-
21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING
The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the
work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such obser-
vation and testing at any location wherever work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain
the scope of any observation which may be contemplated by owner or Owner's Representative and shall give am-
ple notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Rep-
resentative may reject any work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, re-
gardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of
whether Owner's observer has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any work
should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Repre-
sentative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is
being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representa-
tive to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's
Representative may require Contractor to furnish owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection,
testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the
work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed
by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required
by law or the contract documents.
If any work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or
consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representa-
tive, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspec-
tions, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work
which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approval, and any work which meets
the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents
P—• shall be considered defective. Such defective work shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense.
Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by
Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under this agreement to make such inspections,
tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from his obligation to perform the work in accordance with
the requirements of the contract documents.
�-. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES
It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work
for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or owners' Representative as un-
suitable or not in conformity with plans, specification and contract documents, the Contractor shall, after
receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and re-
build or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with this contract. It is fur-
ther agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense.
23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS
The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit,
in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part
thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this
contract and the accompanying bond.
If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the
basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they in-
crease the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such
increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such
work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra work. In
-28-
case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or mate-
rial already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material
or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in
preparation for the work as originally planned.
24. EXTRA WORK
The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be
required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, al-
teration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not cov-
ered by Contractor's proposal, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein.
It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representa-
tive when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the
right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also
agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined
by the following methods:
Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or
Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or
Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is com-
menced, then the Contractor shall be paid the actual field cost of the work, plus
fifteen (15%) per cent.
In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this para-
graph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as
foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and
equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges
necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including
Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workmen's
Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or
Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts
of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's
Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the
method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these mat-
ters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machin-
ery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of
Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical,
the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work
order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and com-
pensate him for his profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other ele-
ments of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the
Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost
to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost."
No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In
case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which he should receive
compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the Owner's Repre-
sentative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what
does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative in-
sists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for
written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided
under Method (C). The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to arbi-
tration as herein below provided.
-29-
p-
25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS
,g It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work described in the proposal, the
specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor
and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the
intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. If the Contractor finds any
discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, he should notify the
Owners' Representative and obtain a clarification before the bids are received, and if no such request is
received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the
Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in his proposal to
complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. It is further understood that any re-
quest for clarification must be submitted no later than five days prior to the opening of bids.
26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT
If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the
quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative
may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and
the Contractor shall comply with such order.
If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein speci-
fied, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase his force or equipment, or both, to such an
extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress.
27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC
.— The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workmen's Compensation Insurance with an
insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the
Workmen's Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable
precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable
provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and
equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention
in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state
or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, his sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indem-
nify and save harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees from all suits, actions, or
claims of any character whatsoever, brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sus-
tained by any person or persons or property, on account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or
any subcontractor, their agents or employees, in the execution and supervision of said contract, and the
project which is the subject matter of this contract, on account of the failure of Contractor or any subcon-
tractor to provide necessary barricades, warning lights, or signs and will be required to pay any judgment
with costs which may be obtained against the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees including
attorney's fees.
r—
The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as
an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be
given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work pro-
gresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of his duty and shall not be construed as any assump-
tion of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of his subcontractors.
-30-
28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the Life of this contract, in-
surance protection as hereinafter specified. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company au-
thorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this
contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided
covering the operation of each subcontractor.
A. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance
The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $300,000 Bodily
Injury and $300,000 Property Damage per occurrence to include:
Premises and Operations
Explosion & Collapse Hazard
Underground Damage Hazard
Products & Completed Operations Hazard
Contractual Liability
Independent Contractors Coverage
Personal Injury (with exclusion "c" waived)
The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job, and copy of
the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance.
B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance.
The Contractor shall obtain an Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance policy
naming the City of Lubbock as insured and the amount of such policy shall be as follows
For bodily injuries, including accidental death, $500,000 per occurrence, and $100,000 for Property
Damage.
C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than;
Bodily Injury $250/500,000
Property Damage $100,000
to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -
owned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific
job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance.
D. Builder's Risk Insurance
The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of (100% of poten-
tial loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured.
-31-
E. Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of
($1,000,000 minimum) with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehen-
sive Automobile Liability coverages.
The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of
the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance.
F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance
As required by State statute covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Sub-
contractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $100,000 limit.
G. Proof of Coverage
Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the
Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and
offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized
representative of the insurance company setting forth:
(1) The name and address of the insured.
(2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies.
(3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne
by such certificate.
(4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the
date borne by such certificate.
(5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named in-
sured at the address shown in the bid specifications.
(6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in
or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate.
(7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) con-
tained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be accept-
able.
29. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY EQUIPMENT
AND SUPPLIES
The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the owner harmless from all claims growing out of any
demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts
thereof, equipment, power tools, all suppliers, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the
performance of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence
that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived.
if during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by
any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness
within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness
-32-
shall remain unpaid, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such
unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness.
Any and all communications between any party under this paragraph must be in writing.
30. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION
The contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, de-
vice, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Paten-
tee or Owner thereof. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or
copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that
Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular
design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is speci-
fied or required in these contract documents by owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, de-
vice, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save owner harm-
less from any loss on account thereof. If the material or process specified or required by Owner is an in-
fringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives written notice to the
Owner of such infringement.
31. LAWS AND ORDINANCES
The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and
regulations, which in any manner effect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the
Owner against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether
by the Contractor or his employees. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at
variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Owners' Representative in writing and any necessary changes
shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work
knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the
Owner's Representative, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom.
The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, in-
sofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the
Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to
the same effect as though embodied herein.
32. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING
The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to
the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature
of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor
from his full obligations to the Owner, as provided by this contractual agreement.
33. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the owner, that the date of
beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract of work to be done hereunder are essential
conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this
contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the Notice to Proceed.
If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or
any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the con-
sideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total
compensation, the sum of $100.00 (ONE HUNDRED DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages
-33-
for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every calendar day that the Contractor shall
be in default after the time stipulated for completing the work.
It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the com-
pletion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consid-
eration the average climatic change and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this Local-
ity.
The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because of the impractica-
bility and extreme difficulty in fixing and ascertaining actual damages the Owner would in such event sus-
tain, and the amount is agreed to be damages the Owner would sustain and shall be retained by the Owner from
current periodical estimates for payments or from final payment.
It is further agreed and understood between the Contractor and Owner that time is of the essence of this
contract.
34. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION
It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Con-
tractor shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and
in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and
time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in
accordance with this contact, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in
the proposals; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by his
own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this
contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the
Owner shall be harmonized.
The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative,
schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor proposes to carry on the work, with dates at
which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the sev-
eral parts.
--� 35. EXTENSION OF TIME
The Contractor agrees that he has submitted his proposal in full recognition of the time required for the
completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions
prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 33 hereinabove
set forth and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this contract,
except when his work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees
of the Owner or other contractors employed by the owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike,
walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. The Contractor may apply in writing for an ex-
tension of time, submitting therewith all written justification as may be required by Owner's Representative
... for such an extension as requested by Contractor. The Owner's Representative within ten (10) days after re-
ceipt of a written request for an extension of time by the Contractor supported by all requested docu-
mentation shall then submit such written request to the City Council of the City of Lubbock for their con-
sideration. Should the Contractor disagree with the action of City Council on granting an extension of
time, such disagreement shall be settled by arbitration as hereinafter provided.
36. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS
In executing the contract agreement, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within
the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays in-
cident to such work, whether growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge
-34-
shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of
the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's
Representative for the owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the judgment of the Owner's
Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor.
37. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS
No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length,
area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided.
In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract,
including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be
done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various
classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to
be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their proposals of-
fered for the work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials
to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for
payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done
and materials furnished on the project.
38. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY
The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any
way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken
under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be
Liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent
property. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner against any claim or claims
for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing out of the perfor-
mance of this contract, but such indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the exis-
tence or character of the work.
39. PRICE FOR WORK
In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all
work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity
with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price
set forth in the proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor
hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the
aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by him and for well and truly performing the same and the
whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract
documents and requirements of Owner's Representative.
40. PAYMENTS
No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the
contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of de-
fective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or
Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness
in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or
otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the con-
tract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all
claims against Owner which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract.
-35-
41. PARTIAL PAYMENTS
On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an applica-
tion for partial payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment and the
progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order shall prepare a certificate for par-
tial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and
including the last day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all sound ma-
terials delivered on site of the work that are to be fabricated into the work.
The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount
of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5%
shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may
be retained by Owner under the terms of this agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole
work be near to completion, and this fact is certified to by Owner's Representative and some unexpected and
some unusual delay occurs due to no fault or negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Owner may upon
written recommendation of Owner's Representative pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained per-
centage due Contractor.
42. FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE
Within thirty-one (31) days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that
the work has been completed or substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and the owner shall in-
spect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed in ac-
cordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor his
certificate of completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty of the Owner within thirty-one (31) days to
issue a certificate of acceptance of the work to the Contractor.
43. FINAL PAYMENT
Upon the issuance of the certificate of completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final
measurement and prepare a final statement of the value of all work performed and materials furnished under
the terms of the agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or be-
fore the 31st day after the date of certificate of completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of
this agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual obligations under the terms of this con-
tract; and said payment shall become due in any event upon said performance by the Contractor. Neither the
certificate of acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve
the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the special condi-
tions (if any) of this contract or required in the specifications made a part of this contract.
44. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK
Contractor shall promptly remove from Owners' premises all materials condemned by the owner's Representative
on account of failure to conform to the contract, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Con-
tractor shall at his own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming
to the requirements of the contract. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other
contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such
condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative,
Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense.
45. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT
Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in this contract shall relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for
,... any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the
-36-
date of substantial completion. The Owner or the Owner's Representative shall give notice of observed de-
fects with reasonable promptness.
46. PAYMENT WITHHELD
The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any
certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of:
(a) Defective work not remedied.
(b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims.
(c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor.
(d) Damage to another contractor.
When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner,
which will protect the owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of
them.
47. TIME OF FILING CLAIMS
It is further agreed by both parties hereto that alL questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the
Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) days after the
Owner's Representative has given any directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to
take exception. The Owners' Representative shall reply to such written exceptions by the Contractor and
render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal from the decision of the Owner's
Representative, any demand for arbitration shall be filed with the Owner's Representative and the Owner in
writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the final decision of the Owner's
Representative. It is further agreed that final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the acceptance by
the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any claim by either party, except where noted other-
wise in the contract documents.
48. ARBITRATION
All questions of dispute under this agreement shall be submitted to arbitration at the request of either
party to the dispute. The parties may agree upon one arbitrator, otherwise, there shall be three; one named
in writing by each party and the third chosen by the two arbiters selected; or if the arbiters fail to se-
lect a third within ten (10) days, he shall be chosen by the District Judge, 72nd Judicial District of
Texas. Each arbiter shall be a resident of the City of Lubbock. Should the party demanding arbitration
fail to name an arbiter within ten (10) days of the demand, his right to arbitrate shall lapse, and the de-
cision of the Owner's Representative shall be final and binding on him. Should the other party fail to
choose an arbiter within ten (10) days, the Owner's Representative shall appoint such arbiter. Should ei-
ther party refuse or neglect to supply the arbiters with any papers or information demanded in writing, the
arbiters are empowered by both parties to take Ex Parte Proceedings.
The arbiters shall act with promptness. The decision of any two shall be binding on both parties to the
contract, unless either or both parties shall appeal within ten (10) days from date of the award by the ar-
biters, and it is hereby agreed that each party shall have the right of appeal and all proceedings shall be
according to and governed by Arbitration Statutes of Texas, being Article 224, et seq., Vernon's Annotated
Civil Statutes. THE DECISION OF THE ARBITERS UPON ANY QUESTION SUBMITTED TO ARBITRATION UNDER THIS CONTRACT
SHALL BE A CONDITION PRECEDENT TO ANY RIGHT OF LEGAL ACTION.
-37-
The arbiters, if they deem the case demands it, are authorized to award the party whose contention is sus-
tained, such sums as they deem proper for the time, expense and trouble incident to the appeal, and if the
appeal was taken without reasonable cause, they may award damages for any delay occasioned thereby. The ar-
biters shall fix their own compensation, unless otherwise provided by agreement, and shall assess the costs
and charges of the arbitration upon either or both parties. The award of the arbiters must be made in writ-
ing and shall not be open to objection on account of the form of proceedings or award.
49. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR
In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written
notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the or-
ders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, this Agreement, or
the Specifications hereto attached, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to
complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor.
After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery,
equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and
equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the
Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any
rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as
provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and
materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement.
In case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided
for within ten (10) days after service of such notice, then the owner may provide for completion of the work
in either of the following elective manners:
(a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and sup-
plies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor,
machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged
shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at
any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense
is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been com-
^^ plated by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense
is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been com-
pleted by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess
to the Owner; or
(b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspa-
per having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the
completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this
contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what
would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and
the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to complete any such new
contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this
contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith.
When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified
and certificates of completion and acceptance, as provided in paragraph 42 hereinabove set forth, shall be
issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as
being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, whereon the Contractor or
his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within
30 days after the date of certificate of completion.
-38-
In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which
would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this
contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the
owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be
turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract
price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated
hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the
work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the
Contractor and his Surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that
actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of
such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the
duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date
of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net
sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety. Such sale may be made at either
public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machin-
ery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the 'jobsite and belong to persons other than
the Contractor or his Surety, to their proper owners.
50. ABANDONMENT BY OWNER
In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply
with said terms within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then the Contractor may
suspend or wholly abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools, and equipment, and all
materials on the ground that have not been included in payments to the Contractor and have not been incorpo-
rated into the work. Thereupon, the Owner's Representative shall make an estimate of the total amount
earned by the Contractor, which estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said con-
tractor at the prices stated in the the attached proposal, the value of all partially completed work at a
fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided
for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the Con-
tractor to carry the whole work to completion, and which cannot be utilized. The Owner's Representative
shall then make a final statement of the balance due the Contractor by deducting from the above estimate all
previous payments by the Owner and all other sums that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this
Agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner who shall pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days
after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by said final statement as due the
Contractor, under the terms of this Agreement.
51. BONDS
The successful bidder shall be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with
Article 5160, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes in the amount of 100% of the total contract price, in the
event said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statu-
tory bonds will not be required. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner,
and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. And it is fur-
ther agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished.
52. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special con-
ditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the
special conditions shall control.
-39-
n
53. LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES
Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the
work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution
of the same, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the
work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense.
54. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and au-
thority to direct, supervise, and control his own employees and to determine the method of the performance
of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to ob-
serve Contractors work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly
reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at
any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either
the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or
corporation.
55. CLEANING UP
The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and
at the completion of the work he shall remove all such debris and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus
materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and
condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor.
-40-
(THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY)
r-
CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
It
-41-
(THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY)
• �`; Resolution #2502
` January 8, 1987
Agenda Item #18
DGV:da
OCCA1 IITTARI
WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general
prevailing rate of per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or
mechanics needed to execute public works contracts for the City of Lubbock
in accordance with the provisions of Vernon's Ann.Civ.St., Art. 5159a; and
WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719
enacted February 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February
23, 1984; and
WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order
to reflect the current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE:
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
-� THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works
.contracts shall be as set forth in the following named exhibits, which
exhibits shall be attached hereto and made a part hereof for all intents
and purposes:
Exhibit A: Building Construction Trades `
Exhibit B: Paving and Highway Construction Trades
Exhibit C: Electrical Trades
Exhibit D: Overtime Rate
Exhibit E: Weekend and Holiday Rate
Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing
rate of per diem wages in all localities where public works are undertaken
on behalf of the City of Lubbock and such wage rates shall be included in
all public works contracts as provided by law.
Passed by the City Council this 8th day of January 1987.
� v
Ranettc-Boyd, City Secretary
APPROVED T ONTENT:
t;
Bi 1 P yne, Director of Building
Services
B.C. McMINN, MAYOR
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
�111.iver, First
Assistant City Attorney
EXHIBIT A
City of Lubbock
Building Construction Trades
Prevailing Rates
-
Craft
Hourly Rate
Acoustical Ceiling Installer
$11.60
Air Conditioner Installer
8.35 -
Air Conditioner Installer -Helper
- 5.50
Bricklayer
10.50
Bricklayer -Helper
5.00
Carpenter
11.00
Carpenter -Helper
5.50
Cement Finisher
7.35
Drywall Hanger _
8.70 -
Electrician
10.50
Electrician -Helper
5.25
Equipment Operator -
-
Heavy
8.00
Light
5.70
Floor Installer
8.00
Glazier
7.50 _
Insulator, Piping/Boiler
9.50
Insulator -Helper
5.00
Iron Worker
7.30 _
Laborer, General
4.75
Mortar Mixer
5.60
Painter
8.75 _
Plumber
9.25
Plumber -Helper
6.00
Roofer
7.65
Roofer -Helper
4.75
Sheet Metal Worker
8.75
Sheet Metal Worker -Helper
5.50
- Welder - Certified
8.00 -
Craft
EXHIBIT B
Paving and Highway Construction
Prevailing Wage Rates
Asphalt Heaterman
.Asphalt Shoveler
Concrete Finisher
Concrete Finisher -Helper
Electrician
Flagger
Form Setter
Form Setter -Helper
Laborer, General
Laborer, Utility
Mechanic
Mechanic -Helper
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS
Asphalt Paving Machine
Bulldozer
Concrete Paving Machinist
Front End Loader
Heavy Equipment Operator
Light Equipment Operator
Motor Grade Operator.
Roller
Scraper
Tractor
Truck Driver -
Light
Heavy
.
Hourlv Rate
$5.25
4.75
7.35
4.75
10.50
4.75
6.50
5.50
4.75
5.80
6.50
6.00
6.00
5.25
6.50
5.85
6.40
6.40
8.00
5.25
5.25
5.50
5.25
5.25
t
EXHIBIT C
Electric Construction Trades
Prevailing Wage Rates
Craft Hourly Rate
Power Line Foreman $11.00
Lineman Journeyman 10.45
Lineman Apprentice Series 8.90
Groundman Series 7.25
EXHIBIT D
Prevailing Wage Rates
Overtime Rate
The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) is 1 1/2
times base rate.
EXHIBIT E
Prevailing Wage Rates
Weekend and Holiday Rate
The rate for weekend and holiday is.1 1/2 times base rate.
SPECIFICATIONS
-42-
(THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY)
LAND APPLICATIONS OFFICE ADDITION
East 19th Street
for the City of Lubbock
ARC
r � �
S'
6584
TABLE OF CONTENTS: Following is the enumeration of the technical
specifications, plans and addenda which form a part of this contract as
set forth in Paragraph 1 of the General Conditions, "Contract and
Contract Documents".
Pages
Title Page 1
Table of Contents 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
not applicable
DIVISION 2 SITEWORK
Section 2A1 Site Clearing
Section 2BO Excavating, Filling and Grading 8
DIVISION 3 CONCRETE
Section 3AO ConcreEe Work
DIVISION 4 MASONRY
not applicable
DIVISION 5
METALS
Section
5JO
Metal FabricaEions
p— DIVISION 6
CARPENTRY
Section
6 0
Carpentry
Section
6GO
Architectural Woodwork
7
DIVISION 7
MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section
7J0
Roofing
Section
7TO
Joint Sealers
5
DIVISION 8
DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS
Section
8G3
Aluminum Windows
Section
8KO
Wood Doors
5
Section
8SO
Builders Hardware
9
DIVISION 9 FINISHES
Section 9DO Gypsum Drywall
Section 9GO Tile Work 4
-- TABLE OF CONTENTS 1
Section
9NO
Resilient Flooring 3
Section
9RO
Carpeting 4
Section
9TO
Painting 8
Section
9Y5
Vinyl Wall Covering 3
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
Section 1OB1 Toilet Accessories
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT
not applicable
DIVISION 12
FURNISHINGS
Section
12B1
Horizontal Venetian Blinds
DIVISION 13
SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
not app
ica le
DIVISION 14
CONVEYING SYSTEMS
not app
ica e
DIVISION 15
MECHANICAL
Section
15AO
Mechanical and ElectricalGeneral
Section
15B
Mechanical Identification 1
Section
15C
Pipe, Tubes and Fittings 6
Section
15D
Valves 4
Section
15G
Domestic Water Piping Systems 3
Section
15H
Soil & Waste Piping Systems 2
Section
15I
Heating/Cooling Units 3
Section
15K
Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 3
Section
15L
Automatic Temperature Controls 3
Section
15M
Power Ventilators 2
Section
150
Low Pressure Ductwork 7
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
Section
16B
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Section
16C
Wiring Devices 3
Section
16D
Power Distribution 3
Section
16E
Building Lighting 4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 2A1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any), apply to
the work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of site clearing is shown on the drawings.
Site clearing work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
Protection of existing trees.
Removal of trees and other vegetation.
Topsoil stripping.
Clearing and grubbing.
Removing above -grade improvements.
Removing below -grade improvements.
JOB CONDITIONS:
Protection of Existing Improvements:
Provide protections necessary to prevent damage to existing
improvements indicated to remain in place.
Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on the Owner's
property.
Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable
to parties having jurisdiction.
Protection of Existing Trees and Vegetation:
Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in
place, against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots,
skinning and bruising of bark., smothering of trees by stockpiling
construction materials or excavated materials within drip line, excess
foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line.
Provide temporary guards to protect trees and vegetation to be left
standing.
SITE CLEARING 2A1-1
EXECUTION
SITE CLEARING:
General:
Remove vegetation, improvements, or obstructions interfering with
installation of new construction.
Topsoil: Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in
a— d—eP-W of not less than 4". Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free
of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2" in diameter,
and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material.
Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent
intermingling with the underlying subsoil or other objectionable
material.
Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping.
Where trees are indicated to be left standing, stop topsoil
stripping a sufficient distance to prevent damage to the main root
system.
Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas shown, or where otherwise
directed. Construct storage piles to freely drain surface water.
Cover storage piles if required to prevent windblown dust.
Clearing and Grubbing: Clear the site of vegetation, except for that
indicated to be let standing.
Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with
satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is
indicated.
Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6" loose depth,
and thoroughly compact to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
Removal of Improvements: Remove above -grade and below -grade
improvements necessary to permit construction, and other work as
indicated.
DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS:
Burning on Owner's Property: Burning is not permitted on the Owner's
-� property.
Removal from Owner's Property:
Remove waste materials and unsuitable and excess topsoil from the
Owner's property and dispose of legally.
-- END OF SECTION
SITE CLEARING 2A1-2
SECTION 2BO
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any) apply to the
work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of excavation, filling and grading is shown on the drawings.
Preparation of subgrade for building slabs, walks, and pavements
is included as part of this work.
Drainage fill course for support of building slabs is included as
part of this work.
Backfilling of trenches within the building lines is included as
part of this work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with
applicable requiremen s of governing authorities having jurisdiction.
Testing and Inspection Service:
Employ, at Contractor's expense, a testing laboratory acceptable to
Architect to perform soil testing and inspection service for quality
control testing during earthwork operations.
SUBMITTALS:
Test Reports -Excavating, Filling, and Grading:
Submit 2 copies of the following reports directly to the Architect from
the testing services, with copy to the Contractor:
Field density test reports.
JOB CONDITIONS:
Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in the areas
of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means
of protection during earthwork operations.
EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 2BO-1
Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be
encountered during excavation, consult the Utility Owner immediately
for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping
respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged
utilities to satisfaction of utility owner.
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and
used by Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by Architect
and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been
provided.
Use of Explosives:
The use of explosives is not permitted.
Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations
occurring as part of this work anT post with warning lights.
Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having
jurisdiction.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other
facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement,
undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations.
PRODUCTS
SOIL MATERIALS:
nafinitinns:
Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO) M145, soil classification Groups A-1,
A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3.
Unsatisfactory soil materials are those defined in AASHTO M145 soil
classification Groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7; also, peat
and other highly organic soils.
Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural
or crushed gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, natural or crushed
sand, as acceptable to the Architect.
Drainage Fill: Washed, uniformly graded mixture of crushed stone, or
crushed or uncrushed gravel, with 100% passing a 1-1/ 2" sieve and not
more than 5% passing as No. 4 sieve.
Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay,
rocR or gravel larger tan 2" in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen
materials, vegetable and other deleterious matter.
EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 2BO-2
EXECUTION
INSPECTION:
Examine the areas and conditions under which excavating, filling, and
grading are to be performed and notify the Contractor, in writing of
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely. completion of the work.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in an acceptable manner.
EXCAVATION:
Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material encountered
when establishing required grade elevations.
Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond
indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction
of Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work
directed by the Architect, shall be at the Contractor's expense.
Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized
excavation by extending the indicated bottom elevation of the footing
or base to the excavation bottom. without altering required top
elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to
proper position, when acceptable to Architect.
Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified
for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise
directed by Architect.
Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade
elevations, notify —the Architect who will make an ,inspection of
conditions.
If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at the required
subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace the excavated
material as directed by the Architect.
Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be
paid on the basis of contract conditions relative to changes in work.
Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from
tfowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding
area.
Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to
prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and
soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations.
Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge
lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water
away from excavations.
EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 2BO-3
Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where
directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape
stockpiles for proper drainage.
Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations.
.Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein
specified.
Excavation for Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions shown
within a tolerance of pus or minus 0.10', and extending a sufficient
�., distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of
concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and
for inspection.
In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb
bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before
concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and
grades to leave solid base to receive concrete.
Excavation for Trenches: Dig trenches to the uniform width required
Tor the particular item to be installed, sufficiently wide to provide
ample working room.
Excavate trenches to the depth indicated or required. Carry the depth
of trenches for piping to establish the indicated flow lines and invert
elevations. Beyond the building perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches
sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze -ups.
Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells to
provide solid bearing for the entire body of the pipe.
COMPACTION:
General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum
percentage of density specified for each area classification.
Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements:
Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry
density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture density
relationship determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557; and not less
than the following percentages of relative density, determined in
accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-
defined moisture -density relationship.
Structures: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of
ac c i 1—or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90%
relative dry density.
EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 2BO-4
Building Slabs and Steps: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each
ayer OT backtillor till material at 95% maximum dry density or
90% relatively dry density.
Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer
of backfill or fill material at 90% maximum dry density.
Walkways: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill
or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry
density.
Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be
moisture con i Toned before compaction, uniformly apply water to
surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water
appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too
wet to permit compaction to specified density.
Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to
permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry.
Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture
content is reduced to a satisfactory value.
BACKFILL AND FILL:
General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to required subgrade
e eva ions, for each area classification listed below.
In excavations, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material.
Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow
material.
Under walks and pavements, use subbase material or satisfactory
excavated or borrow material, or combination of both.
Under steps, use subbase material.
Under building slabs, use drainage fill material.
Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until
completion of the following:
Inspection, testing, approval,
underground utilities.
Removal of concrete formwork.
Removal of trash and debris.
and recording locations of
EXCAVATING,.FILLING AND GRADING 2BO-5
Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory
soil materials, o s ruc ions', and deleterious materials from ground
surface prior to placement of fills. Plow strip, or break-up sloped
surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that fill material
will bond with existing surface.
When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified
under "Compaction" for the particular area classification, break up the
ground surface, pulverize, moisture -condition to the optimum moisture
content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum
density.
Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers
not more than in loose depth for material compacted by heavy
compaction equipment, and not more than 4" in loose depth for material
compacted by hand -operated tampers.
Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide
�^ the optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required
percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area
classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces
that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.
Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to
required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill
against structures by carrying the material uniformly around structure
to approximately same elevation in each lift.
GRADING:
General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this
section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface
within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes
between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and
existing grades.
Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines
o rain away Trom structures and to prevent ponding.
Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows:
Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within
not more than 0.10' above or below the required su bgrade
elevations.
Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and
cross-section, with finish surface not more than 0.10' above or
below the required subgrade elevation.
Grading Surface of Fill Under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even,
free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation.
Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/2" when tested with a 10'
straightedge.
EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 2BO-6
P_
Compaction:
After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and percentage of
maximum density for each area classification.
BUILDING SLAB DRAINAGE COURSE:
General: Drainage course consists of placement of drainage fill
material, in layers of indicated thickness, over subgrade surface to
support concrete building slabs.
Placing:
Place drainage fill material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform
thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness.
Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting material during
placement operations.
When a compacted drainage course is shown to be 6" thick or less, place
material in a single layer. When shown to be more than 6" thick, place
material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6" or less
than 3" in thickness when compacted.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow testing service to
inspect and approve subgrades and fill layers before further
construction work is performed.
Perform field density test in accordance with
ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method) o ASTM D 2167 (robber balloon
method), as applicable.
Footing Subgrade: For each strata of soil on which footings will
e placed, con uct at least one test to verify required design
bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of each
footing subgrade may be based on a visual comparison of each
subgrade with related tested strata, when acceptable to Architect.
Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade: Make at least one field
density test ot subgrade tor every 200 q. ft. of paved area or
building slab, but in no case less than 3 tests. In each
compacted fill layer, make one field density test for every 2000
sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case
less than 3 tests.
If in opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and
inspection, subgrade or fills which have been placed are below
specified density, provide additional compaction and testing at no
additional expense.
EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 2BO-7
MAINTENANCE:
Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic
and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted area to
specified tolerances.
Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are
disturbed y subsequent construction operations or adverse weather,
scari fy surface, re -shape, and compact to required density prior to
further construction.
DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS:
Removal from Owner's Property:
Remove waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material,
trash and debris, and dispose of it off the Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 2BO-8
SECTION 3AO
CONCRETE
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General Supplementary
Conditions and General Requirements (if any), apply to the work
specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of concrete work shown on the drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Codes and Standards:
Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and
standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings".
ACI 311 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection".
ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete".
ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork".
ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting
and Placing Concrete".
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard
Practice".
Workmanship:
The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which
does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength,
tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient concrete as directed by the
Architect.
Concrete Testing Service: Employ, at Contractor's expense a testing
laboratory acceptable to Architect to perform material evaluation tests
and to design concrete mixes.
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-1
Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as
directed by the Architect, at anytime during the progress of the work.
Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities at all times.
Tests, not specifically indicated to be done at the Owner's expense,
-- including the retesting of rejected materials and installed work, shall
be done at the Contractor's expense.
Tests for Concrete Materials: Test aggregates by method of sampling
and testing of ASIM G JJ.
For portland cement, sample the cement and determine the properties by
the methods of test of ASTM C150.
Submit written reports to the Architect, for each material sampled and
tested, prior to the start of work. Provide the project identification
name and number, date of report, name of contractor, name of concrete
testing services, source of concrete aggregates, material manufacturer
and brand name for manufactured materials, values specified in the
referenced specification for each material, and test results. Indicate
whether or not material is acceptable for intended use.
SUBMITTALS:
Manufacturer's Data; Concrete Work: Submit manufacturer's product data
�. with application and ins--ta-TTation instructions for proprietary
materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories,
admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, chemical
floor hardeners, dry -shake finish materials, and others as requested by
the Architect.
Laboratory Test Reports; Concrete Work: Submit 2 copies of laboratory
est reports of concrete materials and mix design test as specified.
PRODUCTS
FORM MATERIALS:
Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or
specified, construct tormwork for exposed concrete surfaces with
plywood, metal, metal -framed plywood faced or other acceptable panel -
type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed
surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of
joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings. Provide form
material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly -
placed concrete without bow or deflection.
REINFORCING MATERIALS:
Reinforcing Bar (ReBar): ASTM A 615, and as follows:
Provide Grade 60, except where otherwise shown, for bars No. 3 to
18.
CONCRETE WORK
R
3AO-2
Welded Wire Fabric (WWF): ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.
Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement
including o sters, c airs, spacers and other devices for spacing,
supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in
place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations,
unless otherwise indicated. Wood, brick and other devices will not be
acceptable.
For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal
runners where wetted base material will not support chair legs.
CONCRETE MATERIALS:
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1,- unless otherwise acceptable to
Architect.
Use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise
acceptable to Architect.
Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, and as herein specified. Provide
aggregates from a single— source for all exposed concrete.
Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 but which have shown
by special test or actual service to produce concrete of adequate
strength and durability may be used when acceptable to the
Architect.
Dune sand, bank -run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable.
Coarse Aggregate: Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no
clay, mu oam or foreign matter, as follows.
Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bankrun
gravel is not permitted.
Maximum Aggregate Size: Not larger than one -fifth of the
narrowest imension etween sides of forms, one-third of the depth
of slabs, nor three -fourths of the minimum clear spacing between
individual reinforcing bars or bundles of bars.
These limitations may be waived if, in the judgement of the
Architect, workability and methods of consolidation are such
that concrete can be placed without honeycomb or voids.
Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C 330.
Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable.
Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete, unless
otherwise authorized in writing by Architect.
RELATED MATERIALS:
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-3
Performed Expansion Joint Fillers: See 7T-Series sections.
Joint Sealing Compound: See 7T-Series sections.
Moisture Barrier: Provide moisture barrier cover over prepared base
material where shown on drawings. Use only materials which are
resistant to decay when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as
follows:
Polyethylene sheet not less than 8 mils thick.
Moisture -Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C
Polyethylene film.
PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES:
Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in
accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM C 94. Use an independent
testing facility acceptable to the Architect for preparing and
reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the
same as used for field quality control testing unless otherwise
acceptable to the Architect.
Submit written reports to the Architect of each proposed mix for each
class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not
begin concrete_ production until mixes have been reviewed by the
^' Architect.
Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following
.. properties, as indicated on drawings and schedules:
2500 psi 28-day compressive strength; 440 lbs. cement per cu. yd.
minimum; W/C ratio, 0.65 maximum.
Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested
y the Contractor when c aracteristics of materials, job conditions,
weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant; at not
additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the Architect.
Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must
be submitted to and accepted by the Architect before using in the work.
Admixtures:
&�° Use air -entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless
otherwise indicated. Add air -entraining admixture at the
manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of
�-• placement having air content within the following limits:
Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing or
subjected to hydraulic pressure:
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-4
4% for max. 2" aggregate.
Other Concrete: 2% to 4% air.
Use admixtures for water -reducing and set -control in strict compliance
with the manufacturer's directions.
Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for
climatic conditions prevailing at the time _of placing. Adjust
quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality
control.
Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump
at the p point of placement as follows:
Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3".
Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1" and not more than
All Other Concrete: Not less than 1" and not more than 4".
CONCRETE MIXING:
Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ASTM C 94, and as
herein specs ie . -
Delete the -references for allowing additional water to be added to
the batch for material with insufficient slump. Addition of water
to the batch will not be permitted.
During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting
of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C 94 may be
required.
When the air temperature is between 85 degrees F. and 90 degrees
F., reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75
minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90 degrees F.,
reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
EXECUTION
FORMS: Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support
ver 1cal and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can
be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete
members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation
and position.
Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage
to cast -in -place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials.
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-5
f-
Construct forms complying with ACI 347, to sizes shapes, lines and
dimensions shown, and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades,
level and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings,
offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, molding, rustication, reglets,
.. chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and
other features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain
required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide back-up at joints
to prevent leakage of cement paste.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against
the concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where
stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for
inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with
bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets,
recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal.
Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to
accommodate work of trades. Determine size and location of
openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items.
Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.
Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces
o receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris
just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms after concrete
placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks.
PLACING REINFORCEMENT: Comply with the specified codes and standards,
and Concrete Rein orcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for
"Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement
placement and supports, and as herein specified.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other
materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against
displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement
operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners,
bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required.
Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for
concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar
supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement
operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not
toward exposed concrete surfaces.
Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2" beyond the last leg of
continuous bar support. Do not use supports as bases for runways for
concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads.
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-6
Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap
adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire.
Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either
direction.
JOINTS:
Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints, which are
not shown on the drawings, so as not to impair the strength and
appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the Architect.
INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS:
General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other
emm edded items required for other work that is attached to, or
supported by, cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams,
instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be
attached thereto.
Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads
and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain the required
elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide and
secure units sufficiently strong to support the types of screed strips
by the use of strike -off templates or accepted compacting type screeds.
PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES:
Coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form -coating compound before
reinforcement is placed.
Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in
amount, and under conditions of the form -coating compound
manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating material
to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete
surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in
compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
Coat steel forms with a non -staining, rust -preventative form oil or
otherwise protect against rusting. Rust -stained steel formwork is not
acceptable.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT:
Preplacement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete
e formwork insta ation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded
or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit the installation of their
work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work, as required.
Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, as
required where form coatings are not used.
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-7
W
Coordinate the installation_ of joint materials and moisture barriers
with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.
General: Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified.
Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no
concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to
cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section.
If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints
as herein specified. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its
final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing.
Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal
layers not deeper than 24" and in a manner to avoid inclined
construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place
each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.
Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment
supplemented by hand -spading, rodding or tamping. Use equipment and
procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with the
recommended practices of ACI 309, to suit the type of concrete and
project conditions.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and
withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther
than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to
rapidly penetrate the placed layer of concrete and at least 6" into the
preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete
that have begun to set. At each insertion limit the duration of
vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and
complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without
causing segregation of the mix.
Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a
continuous operation, within the limits of construction joints, until
the placing of a panel or section is completed.
Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is
thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and
into corners.
Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and
�.- strikeoff. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving
it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic
surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing
operations.
Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement
operations.
CONCRETE WORK
3AO-8
A-
Cold Weather Placing: Protect concrete work from physical damage or
reduced strength w is could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or
low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein specified.
When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40
degrees F., uniformly heat all water and aggregates before mixing as
required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50
degrees F., and not more than 80 degrees F. at point of placement.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do
not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen
materials.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials containing
antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted
in mix designs.
Hot Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would
seriously impair t e quality and strength of concrete, place concrete
in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified.
Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time
of placement below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled, or
chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature provided
the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount of
mixing.
Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot,
so that the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air
temperature immediately before embedment in concrete.
Wet forms thoroughly before placing concrete.
Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix
designs.
FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES:
Rough Form Finish : For formed concrete surfaces not exposed -to -view
in the Tinish work or by other construction, unless otherwise
indicated. This is the concrete surface having the texture imparted by
the form facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas
repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in
height rubbed down or chipped off.
MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES:
After placing slabs, plane surface to a tolerance not exceeding 1/ 4" in
2' when tested with a 2' straightedge. Slope surfaces uniformly to
drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final
set, with stiff brushes, brooms or rakes.
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-9
Float Finish : Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are
o receive --rowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified,
and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic
waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo, and
as otherwise shown on drawings or in schedules.
After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work surface
until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has
disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit
operation of power -driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with
power -driven floats or by hand -floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a
tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10' when tested with a 10' straight
edge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope
surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a
uniform, smooth, granular texture.
Trowel Finish : Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that
are to be exposed -to -view, unless otherwise shown, and slab surfaces
that are to be covered with resilient flooring, paint or other thin-
film finish coating system.
After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power -
driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing
sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by
final hand -troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in
texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not
exceeding 1/8" in 10' when tested with a 10' straightedge. Grind
smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor
covering system.
Non -Slip Broom Finish: Apply non -slip broom finish to exterior
concrete platforms, steps and ramps, and elsewhere as shown on drawings
or in schedules.
Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface
by brooming with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic
route. Coordinate required final finish with the Architect before
•— application.
CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION:
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and
excessive cold or hot temperature, and maintain without drying at a
relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for
nydratin of cement and proper hardening.
Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from
concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep
continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
CONCRETE WORK
3AO-10
r-
Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and
before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 7 days
in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at end of
final curing period.
Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing, by
moisture -retaining cover curing, by membrane curing, and by
combinations thereof, as herein specified.
Provide moisture curing by following methods:
Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.
Continuous water -fog spray.
Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover,
thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously
wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete
surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
Provide moisture -cover curing as follows:
Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing
concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends
lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.
Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using
cover material and waterproof tape.
Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including
undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by
moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms
are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods
specified above, as applicable.
Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor
topping, and other flat surfaces by application of the appropriate
curing compound.
Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish
flooring by use of moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise directed.
REMOVAL OF FORMS:
Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams,
walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after
cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F for 24 hours after
placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be
damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection
operations are maintained.
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-11
Form facing material may be removed 4 d-ays after placement, only if
•� shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal
of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and
supports.
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS:
Filling -In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for
passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed,
after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete
as herein specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide
other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete
work.
Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms
while concrete is still green and steel -troweling surfaces to a hard,
dense finish with corners, intersections and terminations slightly
rounded.
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS:
Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement
mortar immediately after removal of forms, but only when acceptable to
Architect.
Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/ 4" in any dimension, and
holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no
case to a depth of less than 1". Make edges of cuts perpendicular to
.- the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar or proprietary
patching compound, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat
the area to be patched with neat cement grout, or proprietary bonding
agent.
Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having
detective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of
Architect. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture
irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets;
fins and other projections on surface; and stains and other
discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie
holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured
in place with bonding agent.
Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects
that adversely affect the durability of the concrete. If defects
cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete.
Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as
monolithic slabs, for smoothness and to verify surface plane to
tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high
areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for
trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having
required slope.
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-12
Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely
affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include
crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or which penetrate to
reinforcement or completely through non -reinforced sections regardless
of width, spalling, pop -outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other
objectionable conditions.
Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has
cured at least 14 days.
Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after
completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and
replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into
adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when
acceptable to Architects.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not
exceeding 1" diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh
concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square
cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4" clearance all
around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete,
and brush with a neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent.
Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of the same
type or class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend
with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent
concrete.
Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1" in diameter
by dry -pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound
concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen cleaned
concrete surfaces and brush with neat cement grout coating or concrete
bonding agent. Mix dry -pack, consisting of one part portland cement to
2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only
enough water as required for handling and placing. Compact dry -pack
mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched
area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
Use epoxy -based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by
Architect.
Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance
of Architect.
QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION:
The Contractor will employ a testing laboratory to perform all quality
control testing during construction to submit test reports.
Sampling and testing for quality control during the placement of
concrete may include the following, as directed by the Architect.
Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to
comply with .
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-13
Slump: ASTM C 143; one test for each concrete load at point of
ia'scl-iarge; and one test for each set of compressive strength test
specimens.
Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight
concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for
each set of compressive strength test specimens.
Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40
degrees F. an a ow, and when 80 degrees F. and above; and each
time a set of compression test specimens made.
Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 6 standard
cylinders tor each compressive strength test, unless otherwise
directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test
specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required.
Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 100 cu.
Yds. or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one
day or for each 5,000 sq. ft. of surface area placed; 2 specimens
tested at 7 days, 3 specimens tested at 28-days, and one specimen
,,. retained in reserve for later testing if required.
When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength
tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least
5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are
used.
�.. When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than
50 cu. yds., the strength test may be waived by the Architect if,
in his judgement, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is
provided.
When the strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85% of
companion laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations
and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the
in -place concrete.
Test results will be reported in writing to the Architect and the
Contractor on the same day that test are made. Reports of compressive
strength tests shall contain the project identification name and
number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service,
concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure,
design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and
materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-
day tests and 28-day tests.
Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of
in -place concrete when test results indicate the specified concrete
strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the
structure, as directed by the Architect. The testing service may
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-14
conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders
complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor
shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as
may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-15
SECTION 5JO
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any), apply to
the work specified in this sections.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of metal fabrications work is shown on drawings and includes
items fabricated frojp iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips,
tubes, pipes and castings which are not a part of structural steel or
other metal systems in other sections of these specifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of
shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job
progress; allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field
measurements before fabrication might delay work.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible
o minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units
for reassembly and coordinated installation.
SUBMITTALS:
Manufacturer's Data, Metal Fabrications: For information only, submit
copies of manufacturer's specifications, anchor details and
installation instructions for products to be used in the fabrication of
miscellaneous metal work, including paint products. Indicate by
transmittal that copy of instructions has been distributed to
Installer.
Shop Drawings, Metal Fabrications: Submit shop drawings for
r- a rica ion and erection of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Include
plans, elevations, and details of sections and connections. Show
anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchor and bolt
�.. installation by others.
Samples; Metal Fabrications: Submit 2 sets of representative samples
ot materials and finished products as may be requested by the
Architect. Architect's review will be for color, texture, style, and
finish only. All other requirements for the work are the Contractor's
responsibility.
PRODUCTS:
METAL FABRICATIONS 5JO-1
MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS:
Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work
which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and
free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks,
rolled trade names and roughness.
Steel Tubing: Hot -formed, welded or seamless, ASTM A 501.
Steel Bars and Bar -Size Shapes: ASTM A 306, Grade 65, or ASTM A 36.
Cold -Finished Steel Bars: ASTM A 108, grade as selected by fabricator.
Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type, galvanized ferrous castings,
either malleable iron ASTM A 47 or cast steel ASTM A 27. Provide
bolts, washers and shims as required, hot -dip galvanized, ASTM A 153.
Nonshrink Nonferrous Grout: CE CRD C588.
FASTENERS:
General: Provide zinc -coated fasteners for exterior use or where built
into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class
required.
Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307,
Grade A.
Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561.
Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92.
Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-111.
Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.
Toggle Bolts:
required.
Lock Washers:
PAINT:
Tumble -wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class and style as
Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84.
Metal Primer Paint: Red lead mixed pigment, alkyd varnish, linseed oil
pain - -8 , Type II; or red lead iron oxide, raw linseed oil,
alkyd paint, Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Paint 2-64; or
basic lead silico chromate base iron oxide, linseed oil, alkyd paint,
FS TT-P-615, Type II.
Primer selected must be compatible with finish coats of paint.
Coordinate selection of metal primer with finish paint requirements
specified in Division 9.
METAL FABRICATIONS 5JO-2
- FABRICATION, GENERAL:
Workmanship: Use materials of size and thickness shown or, if not
shown, oT_ required size and thickness to produce strength and
durability in finished product. Work to dimensions shown or accepted
on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use
type of materials shown or specified for various components of work.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and
surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of
approximately 1/ 32" unless otherwise shown. Form bent -metal corners to
smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.
Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS
recommendations. At exposed connection, grind exposed welds smooth and
flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using
concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type
shown or, if not shown, Phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or
bolts.
Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting
structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate
support for intended use.
Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to
receive finish hardware and similar items.
Shop Painting: Shop paint miscellaneous metal work, except members or
portion— sofmembers to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces and
edges to be field welded, and galvanized surfaces, unless otherwise
specified.
Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before applying shop
coat. Clean off heavy rust and loose mills scale in accordance with
SSPC SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning", or SSPC SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning", or
SSPC SP-7 "Brush -Off Blast Cleaning".
Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-
1 "Solvent Cleaning
Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spay on primer in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and at a rate to provide
uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils for each coat.. Use painting
methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges,
and exposed surfaces.
METAL FABRICATIONS 5JO-3
Apply one shop coat to fabricated metal items, except apply 2 coats of
paint to surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change
color of second coat to distinguish it from the first.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS:
Rough Hardware: Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts,
plates, anc ors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron
shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for
anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures.
Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in
Division 6 sections.
Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes and dime sions
required. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear
on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers.
For stud partitions, use lag bolts set into wood backing between studs.
Coordinate with stud installation for accurate location of backing
members.
EXECUTION:
INSPECTION: Installer must examine the areas and conditions under
which miscellaneous metal items are to be installed and notify the
Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to
the Installer.
PREPARATION: Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates,
ins ructiio`ris, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as
concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral
anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction.
Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.
INSTALLATION:
Setting Loose Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of
any bond -reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces.
Clean the bottom surface of bearing plates.
Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable
devices. After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed,
tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if
protruding, cut-off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before
packing with grout.
Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that
no voids remain.
METAL FABRICATIONS 5JO-4
Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and
fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications
to in -place construction; including, threaded fasteners for concrete
and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through -bolts, lag bolts, wood
screws and other connectors as required.
Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting
required tor installation ot miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set
work accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, plumb, level,
true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items which are to
be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction.
r- Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline
joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints,
but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind
exposed joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut
or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot -dip
galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed
field connections.
Field Welding: Comply with AW S Code for procedures of manual shielded
metal -arc elding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods
used in correcting welding work.
Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds,
bolted connec ions, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed
areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or
spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
END OF SECTION
METAL FABRICATIONS 5JO-5
SECTION 6E0
GARPENM
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of the work is shown on drawings and in schedules.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable rules of the
respective grading and inspecting agencies for species and products
indicated.
Plywood Product Standards: Comply with PS 1.
Factory -mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill
and grading agency, except omit marking from surfaces to be exposed
with transparent finish or without finish.
,IIRMTTTAI S'
Wood Treatment Data: Submit treatment mfr's instructions for proper
use of each type of -Treated material.
Dip Treatment: For each type specified, include certification by
treating plant stating chemical solutions used, submersion period
and conformance with specified standards.
PRODUCT HANDLING:
Delivery and Storage: Keep materials dry at all times. Protect
against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces.
Stack lumber and plywood, and provide air circulation within stacks.
JOB CONDITIONS:
Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as
required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers,
blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow proper attachment of
other work.
PRODUCTS:
CARPENTRY 6EO-1
iunTroTAI C•
Lumber, General: Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by
et ail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for
moisture content specified for each use.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
Framing Lumber (2" through 4" thick): For light framing (less than 6"
wide), provide Stud grade lumber for stud framing and "Standard"
grade for other light framing, any species.
For structural framing (6" and wider and from 2" to 4" thick), provide
the following grade and species:
Select Structural grade.
Any species and grade which meets or exceeds the following values:
Fb (minimum extreme fiber stress in bending); 1550 psi.
E (minimum modulus of elasticity); 1,600,000.
Plywood:
Concealed Performance -Rated Plywood: Where plywood will be concealed
y other work, provide - ugged INT-APA.
For plywood sheathing and sub -flooring, provide with exterior
glue.
For floor underlayment, provide UNDERLAYMENT/INT-APA. Provide
fully sanded finish where resilient or fluid -applied finish
flooring (if any) is indicated.
For combination sub-floor-underlayment, provide 2.4.1/INT-APA.
For backing panels for electrical or telephone equipment, provide
fire -retardant treated plywood with exterior glue.
Temp. Hardboard Siding: Provide 4'-8', 7/16" thick panels grooved or
textured o match existing siding and soffit panels.
Finish: Factory primed for paint to match existing.
Fiberboard Sheathing: Provide fiberboard sheathing, ASTM C 208, 25/ 32"
is x panels.
Miscellaneous Materials:
CARPENTRY 6EO-2
P_
Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as
indicated and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with
applicable Federal Specification for nails, staples, screws, bolts,
nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing
anchors of the size and type recommended by the mfr. for each use
including recommended nails.
Building Paper: Asphalt saturated felt, non -perforated, ASTM D 226.
EXECUTION
INSPECTION: Installer must examine the substrates and supporting
structure and the conditions under which the carpentry work is to be
installed, and norify the Contractor in writing of conditions
detrimental to the work. Do not proceed with the installation until
unsatisfactory conditionshave been corrected in a manner acceptable to
the Installer.
INSTALLATION:
General: Discard units of material with defects which impair quality
ofwo_r1<, and units which are too small to use in fabricating work with
minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.
Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with
members plumb and true and accurately cut and fitted.
Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening
as shown and as required by recognized standards. Countersink nail
heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. Use common wire nails,
except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work.
Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite
side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make
tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting
of wood; predrill as required.
Wood Grounds, Nailers, Blocking and Sleepers: Provide wherever shown
and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to
shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to
be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved.
Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading.
Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown.
Build into masonry during installation of masonry work.Where possible,
anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
Provide permanent grounts of dressed, preservative treated, dey-
bevelled lumber not less than 1 1/2" wide and of thickness required to
bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved.
Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
CARPENTRY 6EO-3
Wood Framing, General: Provide framing members of sizes and on
spacings shown, and frame openings as shown, or if not shown, comply
with recommendations of "Manual for House Framing" of National Forest
Products Association. Do not splice structural members between
supports.
Anchor and nail as shown, and to comply with "Recommended Nailing
Schedule" of "Manual for House Framing" and other recommendations of
N.F.P.A.
Stud Framing: Provide stud framing where shown. Unless otherwise
shown, use 'x V wood studs spaced 16" o.c. with 4" face perpendicular
to direction of wall or partition. Provide single bottom plate and
double -top plates 2" thick by width of studs; except single top plate
may be used for non -load -bearing partitions. Nail or anchor plates to
supporting construction.
Construct corners and intersections with not less than 3 studs.
Provide miscellaneous blocking and framing as shown and as required for
support of facing materials, fixtures, specialty items and trim.
Provide continuous horizontal blocking row at mid -height of single -
story partitions over 8' high using 2" thick members of same width as
wall or partitions.
Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header
members of thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and
support jamb studs.
For non -bearing partitions, provide double jamb studs in headers not
less than 4" deep for openings 3' and less in width, and not less than
6" deep for wider openings.
For load -bearing partitions, provide double -jamb studs for openings 6'
and less in width, and triple -jamb studs for wider openings. Provide
headers of depth shown, or if not shown, provide as recommended by NFPA
"Manual for House Framing".
Provide diagonal bracing in stud framing of exterior walls, except as
otherwise indicated. Brace both walls at each external corner, full
�-- story height, at a 45 degree angle, using either a let -in 1 x 4 or 2 x
4 blocking.
Joist Framing:
General: Provide framing of sizes and spacings shown. Install with
crown a ge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1-1/2"
of bearing on wood or metal, or 3" on masonry. Attach to wood bearing
members by toe nailing or metal connectors; frame to wood supporting
members with wood ledgers as shown, or if not shown, with metal
connectors. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by
CARPENTRY 6EO-4
metal joist hangers; double headers and trimmers where span of header
exceeds 4'. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to
1/6-depth of joist, 1/3 at ends. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3-
depth of joist or locate closer than 2" from top or bottom. Provide
solid blocking (2" thick by depth of joist) at ends of joists unless
nailed to header or brand member.
Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders or partitions
not less than 4" or securely tie opposing members together. Provide
solid blocking (2" thick by depth of joist) over supports.
Under jamb studs at opening, provide solid blocking between joist.
Provide bridging between joists where nominal depth -to -thickness ratio
exceeds 4, at intervals of 8'. Use solid wood bridging 2" thick by
depth of joist, and nailed to joist.
Installation of Plywood: Comply with recommendations of the American
Plywood Association (APA), for the installation of plywood.
END OF SECTION
CARPENTRY 6EO-5
SECTION . 1
r- GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS: The general provisions of the contract, including
�..General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to
the work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of each type of architectural woodwork is shown on drawings
and in schedules.
Architectural woodwork is defined to include (inaddition to items so
designated on drawings) miscellaneous exposed wood members commonly
known as "Finish Carpentry" of "Millwork", except where specified under
another section of these specifications.
The types of architectural woodwork include, but are not necessarily
limited to, the following:
Standing and running trim.
Casework with or for paint finish.
Plastic laminate countertops.
Wood shelving.
-- Refer to 8K-Series sections for wood doors.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Quality Standards: Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply with
speci ie provisions of the following:
Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Quality Standards".
Quality Marking: Mark each unit of architectural woodwork with mill's
.- or a ricator s identification and grade mark, located on surfaces
which will not be exposed after installation.
Arrange for the fabrication and installation of architectural woodwork,
with sequence matched wood veneers, to be produced by a single firm.
SIIRMTTT01 C-
Product Data: Submit mfr's specifications and installation
ins ruc ions or each item of factory -fabricated woodwork.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 6GO-1
Quality Certification: Submit mfr's (Fabricator's) certification,
stating at the fa ricated work meets the woodwork grade(s)
specified.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing location of each item,
imensione p ans and elevations, large scale details, attachment
devices and other components. Submit shop drawings for the following:
Framed openings and lights, including trim.
Casework.
Shelving.
Samples: Submit the following samples for each species and cut or
pa ern of architectural woodwork:
Wood for transparent finish; set of 3 pieces, 6"0/4"x2'-0
finished on one side and one edge.
Plastic laminate; 12" square.
Exposed cabinet hardware; one unit of each type and finish.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and handling to
prevent damage, soiling and deterioration'.
Do not deliver woodwork, until painting, wet work, grinding and similar
operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been
completed in installation areas. If, due to unforeseen circumstances,
woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in
areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas.
JOB CONDITIONS:
Conditioning: Installer shall advise Contractor of temperature and
11umi ity requirements for woodwork installation areas. Do not install
woodwork until required temperature and relative humidity have been
stabilized and will be maintained in installation areas.
Maintain temperature and humidity in installation area as required to
maintain moisture content of installed woodwork within a 1.0 percent
tolerance of optimum moisture content, from date of installation
through remainder of construction period. The fabricator of woodwork
shall determine optimum moisture content and required temperature and
humidity conditions.
PRODUCTS:
BASIC MATERIALS AND FABRICATION METHODS:
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 6GO-2
General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with following
requirements for architectural woodwork not specifically indicated as
prefabricated or prefinished standard products.
Wood Moisture Content: Provide kiln -dried lumber with an average
content range of 9% to 13% for exterior work and 6% to 11% for interior
work. Maintain temperature and relative humidity during fabrication,
storage and finishing operations so that moisture content values for
woodwork at time of installation do not exceed the following:
Interior Wood Finish: 4%-9% for dry regions (as defined by AWI).
Interior Wood Finish: 5%-10% for mild regions (as defined by
AW
Exterior Trim: 7%-12% for dry regions (as defined by AWI).
Exterior Trim: 9%-14% for mild regions (as defined by AWI).
W ood for Transparent Finish: Provide species and grade or cut as
tollows, unless otherwise indicated.
Solid Wood: Rift sawn Red Oak.
Veneer: Rift sawn Red Oak.
Wood for Painted Finish: Comply with quality standards for selection
ot species, grade and cut (Fabricator's option, except as otherwise
indicated.)
Plastic Laminate: Comply with NEMA LD-3; type, thickness, color,
pattern and finis as indicated for each application.
Quality Standards: For following types of architectural woodwork;
comply with in icated standards as applicable:
Standing and Running Trim: WIC Sections 10 and 12.
Wood Casework: Sections 14 and 25.
astic Laminate Casework: WIC Sections 15 and 25A.
astic Laminate Countertops: WIC Section 16.
�. Shelving: WIC Section 11.
isce aneous Work: WIC Section 11.
Design and Construction Features: Comply with details shown for
profile and construction of arc itectural woodwork; and, where not
otherwise shown, comply with applicable Quality Standards, with
alternate details as Fabricator's option.
Pre -Cut Openings: Fabricate architectural woodwork with pre-cut
openings, w erever possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work and similar items. Locate openings
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 6GO-3
accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams for proper size
and shape. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in countertops
and similar exposures, seal edges of cutouts with a water-resistant
coating.
Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication of woodwork required
to be its' tea —to other construction, obtain measurements and verify
dimensions and shop drawing details as required for accurate fit.
Where sequence of measuring substrates before fabrication would
delay the project, proceed with fabrication (without field
measurements) and provide ample borders and edges to allow for
subsequent scribing and trimming of woodwork for accurate fit.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK TYPES:
Standing and Running Trim:
Grade: Custom.
Fabricate wood trim and jambs (if any) to dimensions, profiles and
details shown. Rout or groove reverse side (backed -out) of trim
members to be applied to flat surfaces, except for members with ends
exposed in finished work.
Wood Casework, Transparent Finish:
Grade: Custom, except Premium Grade drawer construction.
Provide dust panels of 1/ 4" thick plywood or tempered hardboard above
compartments and drawers, except where located directly below
countertops.
Wood Casework, Paint Finish:
Grade: Economy, except Custom Grade drawer construction.
Exposed Portions: Provide solid wood and plywood (no plywood
substitutes) meeting requirements for specified Quality Grade.
Plastic Laminate Countertops:
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide separate plastic
aml�`e countertops (installed on other casework or other support
system as indicated) to comply with requirements for casework for
plastic laminate finish.
Grade: Same as casework, where casework is architectural woodwork.
Finish of Plastic Laminate: Matte. Color as selected by Architect.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 6GO-4
Ga
W
Plastic Laminate Type: Fire -rated type, 0.050" thick; UL tested and
labeled ratings ot 277or flame spread, 25 for fuel contributed and 100
for smoke developed when bonded to wood particle board.
Wood Storage Shelving, Paint Finish:
General: These requirements do not apply to shelving which is either
intergra with or indicated as "casework"; comply with casework
requirements for those units of shelving.
Grade: Economy.
FINISH FOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK:
General: The entire finish of architectural woodwork is work of
section 9T, regardless of whether shop applied or applied after
installation.
Preparations for Finishing: Comply with AWI Quality Standards, Section
or sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, back priming and
similar preparations for finishing of architectural woodwork, as
applicable to each unit of work.
Transparent Finish:
General Finish Standard: AWI Finish System No. 3, Premium Grade, open
grain finish.
Shop Application: Stain and sealer (match approved sample for
co or .
Final Finish: Sanding, followed by 2 coats of clear alkyd -urea
conversion varnish rubbed to medium sheen.
Paint Finish:
General Finish Standard: AWI Finish System No. 8, Custom Grade, closed
grain finish.
Shop Application: Sealer.
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS:
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated
wit arc itectural woodwork, except for units which are specified as
"door hardware" in 8S-Series sections or in other sections of these
specifications.
Hardware Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with ANSI
merican National Standard for Cabinet Hardware".
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 6GO-5
Quality Level: Type 1 (residential), unless otherwise indicated.
Quality Certification: Where available, provide cabinet hardware
Baring the BHMA certification label, affixed either to hardware
or its packaging, showing compliance with BHMA Cabinet Hardware
Standard 201.
Cabinet Door Hardware: Provide hinges, catches and pulls of types
indicated, to proper y accommodate each door size and style.
Drawer Hardware: Provide slides and pulls of types indicated, to
properly accommodate each drawer size and style.
Equip each drawer with side -mounted, full -extension, ball -bearing,
nylon roller drawer slides.
Shelf Supports: Where shelving is indicated as "adjustable" provide
slotted -type standards and brackets of type needed to properly support
shelves with uniform 40-lb per sq. ft. loading.
Exposed Hardware Finish: Match existing.
EXECUTION:
INSPECTION:
Examination: The Installer must examine substrates and conditions
under w icy work is to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing
of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to
Installer.
Prior to installation of architectural woodwork, examine shop
fabricated work for completion, and complete work as required,
including back priming and removal of packing.
INSTALLATION: Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no
is or ions. shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a
tolerance of 1/8" in 8'-0" for plumb and level (including countertops);
and with 1/16" maximum offset in flush adjoining surfaces, 1/8" maximum
offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces.
Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or
repair damaged finish at cuts.
Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints
Possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber
available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent
and related members. Cope at returns, miter at corners, and comply
with Quality Standards for joinery.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 6GO-6
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to
substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a
r-- complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fasteners
heads are required, use fine finishing nail for exposed nailings,
countersunk and filled flush with woodwork, and matching final finish
where transparent finish is indicated.
Casework: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers will
tit openings properly and be accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to
center doors and drawer in openings and to provide unencumbered
operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items
as indicated. Maintain veneer sequence matching (if any) of casework
with transparent finish.
Countertops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems
as indicated.
Wood Storage Shelving: Complete the assembly of units and install in
e areas indicated, including hardware and accessories as indicated.
ADJUSTMENTS, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION: Repair damaged and
defective woodwork w erever possible to a iminate defects functionally
.� and visually; where not possible to repair properly, replace woodwork.
Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
Clean hardware., lubricate and make final adjustments for proper
operation.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semi -exposed surfaces. Touch-up shop -
applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
Refer to the 9T-Series sections for final finishing of installed
architectural woodwork.
Protection: Installer of architectural woodwork shall advise
on ractor of final protection and maintained conditions necessary to
ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at time of
acceptance.
Cover completed work with 4-mil polyethylene film protective
enclosure, applied in a manner which will allow easy removal and
without damage to woodwork or adjoining work. Remove cover
immediately before time of final inspection.
END OF SECTION
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 6GO-7
SECTION 7JO
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS: The general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any),
apply to the work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of roofing; is shown on the drawings.
The following types of roofing are specified in this section:
Shingles.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Subcontract the roofing and associated work to a single firm, called
the Installer in this section, specializing in the type(s) of roofing
required, so that there will be undivided responsibility for the
performance of the work.
UL Rating: Provide materials and roofing systems which have been
tested, listed and labeled by UL for the following Class or Rating as
roofing:
Match existing.
Comply with insurance rating bureau requirements for Class or Type of
approved roofing as indicated.
Comply with FM Type II requirements.
Mfr. of BUR Materials: Obtain primary BUR materials from a single
m r., who publishes complete information on the required "BUR System",
and offers to guarantee or bond the completed roofing installation as
required. Obtain secondary materials from sources acceptable to the
mfr. of the primary BUR materials.
Manufacturer: Match existing.
SHMRTTTAI S-
Mfr's Data: For information only, submit 2 copies of specifications
and instalTation instructions from the mfr. for each major roofing
product or system required. Include data substantiating compliance
with the requirements. Indicate by transmittal form that the Installer
has received copy of mfr's installation instructions and
recommendations.
ROOFING 7JO-1
Shingles, mfr's unit sizes.
Mfr's Guarantee: Provide standard mfr's service or maintenance
guarantee wla 1 available options and flashing endorsement, signed
by an authorized representative of the mfr.
JOB CONDITIONS: Proceed with roofing work only after substrate
construction an penetrating work have been completed.
Where roofing is required to be bonded or guaranteed by the mfr.,
require mfr's technical representative to participate in the
conference.
�. Weather Conditions: Proceed with roofing work only when weather
conditions are In compliance with mfr's recommended limitations, and
when conditions will permit the work to proceed in accordance with
requirements and the mfr's recommendations.
Temporary Roofing: Refer to the general provisions of the Contract
ivlsion I sec ions) for conditions requiring a consideration of the
P^ temporary roofing.
PRODUCTS
SHINGLES:
Asphalt Shingle Roofing Materials: Match existing.
Fasteners (Nails): Type and size recommended by shingle mfr.
Asphalt Saturated Felt: ASTM D26, 15-lb. type.
EXECUTION
~' PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE: The Installer must examine the surface
condition of the su strate and the conditions under which roofing work
is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of
'— unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to
the Installer.
Clean the substrate of projections and substances detrimental to the
work.
Install cant strips and similar accessories as shown, and as
recommended by the prime materials mfr.
P— Prime the substrate if recommended by the roofing materials mfr; comply
with the mfr's recommendations.
ROOFING 7JO-2
Apply a slip sheet of 5-lb red rosin -sized paper over wood board/timber
substrates where shown or recommended by the roofing materials mfr.
Coordinate roofing with flashing and other adjoining work to ensure
proper sequencing of the entire work.
INSTALLATION
General: Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the
rooting materials mfr., except to the extent more stringent
requirements are indicated.
Performance: It is required that roofing work be watertight for normal
weather exposures, and not deteriorate in excess of normal weathering.
Installation of Shingles:
General: Except as otherwise indicated, install shingles as
recommended by shingle mfr. Provide course of underlayment on
substrate before installation of shingles. Provide accessory items as
shown and as required to make a complete installation of shingle
roofing, including flashings integrated with the shingle work.
PROTECTION:
The Installer shall advise the Contractor (in writing) of recommended
protection for roofing during the remainder of the construction period,
so that the work will be without damage or deterioration (except for
normal weathering) at the time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION
ROOFING 7JO-3
SECTION 7TO
JOINT SEALERS
.� GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the contract, including general and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to the work
specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of each type of joint sealer is indicated on drawings and by
provisions of this section.
The required applications include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the following:
Exterior building wall joints.
Flashing and coping joint.
Miscellaneous concrete construction joints.
SUBMITTALS:
Mfr's Data: Submit mfr's specifications, recommendations and
installation instructions for each type of material required. Include
mfr's published data, or letter of certification, or certified test
laboratory report indicating that each material complies with specified
standards and other requirements, and is intended generally for
applications shown.
Samples: Submit 3, 12" long samples of each color required (except
5Ta-cTT76r each type of joint sealer exposed to view. install sample
between 2 strips of material similar to or representative of typical
surfaces where sealer will be used, held apart to represent typical
joint widths.
�. JOB CONDITIONS: Installer must examine joint surfaces and backing, and
their ancliorage to the structure, and conditions under which joint
sealer work is to be performed, and notify Contractor in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work and performance
of sealers. Do not proceed with joint sealer work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
JOINT SEALERS - 7TO-1
Weather Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of sealants under
adverse weather conditions, or when temperatures are below or above
mfr's recommended temperature range for installation. Proceed with the
work only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper
cure and development of high early bond strength. Where joint width is
affected by ambient temperature variations, install elastomeric
sealants only when temperatures are in lower third of mfr's recommended
installation temperature range.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS:
Colors: For exposed materials provide color as indicated or, if not
In i cated, as selected by Architect from mfr's standard colors. For
concealed materials, provide natural color which has best overall
performance characteristics.
Hardness: As recommended by mfr. for application shown, unless
o ei rw,se indicated.
Modules of Elasticity: Provide the lowest available modules of
elasticity which is consistent with exposure to weathering,
indentation, vandalism, abrasion, support of loading, and other
requirements.
Compatibility: Before purchase of each required material, confirm its
compatibility with each other material it will be exposed to in joint
system.
Size and Shape: As shown or, if not shown, as recommended by mfr. for
type and condition of joint, and for indicated joint performance or
movement.
Grade of Sealant: For each application, provide grade of sealant (non -
sag, self -le g, no -track, knife grade, preformed, etc.) as
recommended by mfr. for particular condition of installation (location,
joint shape, ambient temperature, and similar condition), to achieve
best possible overall performance. Grades specified herein are for
normal condition of installation.
ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS:
One -Component Polyurethane Sealant: Polyurethane -based, one -part
e as omeric sealant, complying with FS TT-S-00230, Class A, Type I
(self -leveling) unless Type II recommended by mfr. for application
shown.
Butyl Rubber Sealant: Polymerized butyl rubber and inert fillers
(pigments), solvent ased with minimum 75% solids, non -sag consistency,
tack -free time of 24 hours or less, paintable, non -staining; complying
with TT-S-001657.
JOINT SEALERS 7TO-2
Oleo -Resinous Caulking Compound: Oil -based resinous caulking compound
complying with - - non -staining, non -bleeding, paintable.
�- Bituminous Caulking Compound: Mfr's standard 1-part bituminous,
general-purpose caulking compound, containing butyl rubber, mineral
fiber, or other modifiers or fillers.
JOINT FILLERS, PAVEMENT TYPES:
Self -Expanding Cork Joint Filler: Provide resilient and non -extruding
type pre -molded cork units complying with ASTM D 1752, Type III, FS HH-
F-341, Type II, Class C; and AASHTO M 153, Type III.
Cork Joint Filler: Provide resilient and non -extruding type pre -molded
cork units comp ying with ASTM D 1752, Type II, FS HH-F-341, Type II,
Class B; and AASHTO M 153, Type II.
CELLULAR/FOAM JOINT FILLERS:
Open -Cell Polyurethane Joint Filler: Provide flexible, highly
compressible, open -cell po yuret ane foam of not less than 1.3 lbs. per
cu. ft. density and not less than 2 psi compresion deflection (25%),
with not more than 10% compression set for 25 hours at 50% compression;
comply with ASTM D 1564.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
Joint Primer/Sealer: Provide type of joint primer/sealer recommended
y sealant mfr. for joint surfaces to be primed or sealed.
�- Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as
recommended y sealant mfr. to be applied to sealant -contact surfaces
where bond to substrate of joint filler must be avoided for proper
performance of sealant. Provide self-adhesive tape wherever
applicable.
Sealant Backer Rod: Compressible rod stock of polyethylene foam
'- polyethylene jac eted polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, neoprene
foam or other flexible, permanent, durable non -absorptive material as
recommended for compatibility with sealant by sealant mfr.
EXECUTION
MFR'S INSTRUCTIONS:
Comply with mfr's printed instructions except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified, and except where mfr's technical
representative directs otherwise.
JOINT PREPARATION:
JOINT SEALERS 7TO-3
Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant or
caulking compound. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other
substances which wold interfere with bond of sealant or caulking
compound. Etch concrete and masonry joint surfaces as recommended by
sealant mfr. Roughen vitreous or glazed joint surfaces as recommended
by sealant mfr.
Prime or seal joint surfaces where shown or recommended by sealant mfr.
Do not allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces.
INSTALLATION:
Set joint filler units at proper depth or position in joint to
coordinate with other work, including installation of bond breakers,
backer rods and sealants. Do not leave voids or gaps between ends of
joint filler units.
Install sealant backer rod
where shown to be omitted
for application shown.
Install bond breaker tape,
recommendations to ensure
properly.
for liquid elastomeric sealants, except
or recommended to be omitted by sealant mfr.
where shown and where required by mfr's
that elastomeric sealants will perform
Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that
sealants will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps
or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of joint bond surfaces equally
on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet
to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces.
Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and vertical
surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap
moisture and dirt.
Install sealant to depths as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by
sealant mfr. but within the following general limitations, measured at
center (thin) section of bead:
For sidewalks, pavements and similar joints sealed with
elastomeric sealants and subject to traffic and other abrasion and
indentation exposures, fill joints to a depth equal to 75% of
joint width, but neither more than 5/8" deep nor less than 3/8"
deep.
For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants but not
subject to traffic, fill joints to a depth equal to 50% of joint
width, but neither more than 1/2" deep nor less than 1/4" deep.
For joints sealed with non-elastomeric sealants and caulking
compounds, fill joints to a depth in range of 75% to 125% of joint
width.
JOINT SEALERS 7TO-4
r-
Spillage: Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto
adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into voids of adjoining surfaces.
Clean adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to
eliminate evidence of spillage.
Recess exposed edges of gaskets and joint fillers slightly behind
adjoining surfaces, unless otherwise shown, so that compressed units
will not protrude from joints.
CURE AND PROTECTION:
Cure sealants and caulking compounds in compliance with mfr's
instructions and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength,
internal cohesive strength and surface durability. Advise Contractor
of procedures required for cure and protection of joint sealers during
construction period, so that they will be without deterioration or
damage (other than normal wear and weathering) at time of Owner's
acceptance.
END OF SECTION
JOINT SEALERS
7TO-5
r-
SECTION
•�111111,100Ak1 o] 'LIZ 0 111'
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to the work
specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of each type (operation) of aluminum window units and storm
doors are shown on the drawings.
The applications of aluminum windows and storm doors on the project
include the following:
Individual units set in wall construction.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, requirements for aluminum
windows, and terminology and standards of performance and fabrication
workmanship are those specified and recommended in ANSI A 134.1 (AAMA
302.8), and applicable general recommendations published by AAMA and
AA.
Manufacturer: Provide aluminum window and storm door units produced by
a single tirm, capable of showing prior successful production of units
similar to those required.
Performance and Testing: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with
air infiltration es s, water resistance tests and applicable load
tests specified in ANSI A 134.1 (AAMA 302.8) for type and
classification of window units required.
Heights of window and storm door units above grade (to centerline) are
shown on or can be calculated from the drawings. Consult Architect for
clarification needed to confirm required loading and test pressures.
Design wind velocity at project site is 90 mph.
SUBMITTALS:
Mfr's Data: Submit mfr's specifications, recommendations and standard
details for aluminum window units and storm doors, including
fabrication, finishing, hardware and other components of the work.
Include certified test laboratory reports as necessary to show
compliance with requirements.
PRODUCTS
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 8G3-1
F"
MANUFACTURER: Match existing or equal.
MATERIALS:
Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by window mfr. for
strength, corrosion resistance and application of required finish, but
not less than 22,000 psi ultimate tensile strength and not less than
0.062" thickness at any location for main frame and sash members.
Comply with ASTM B 221.
Fasteners: Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or other metallic or
non-metallic materials warranted by the mfr. to be non -corrosive and
compatible with the aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors
and other components of the window and storm door units.
Reinforcements: Where fasteners screw -anchor into alum. less than
is , reinforce interior with alum. or non-magnetic
stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard non-
corrosive pressed -in splined gromet nuts.
�^ Provide exposed fasteners (if any) which match finish of members
and hardware being fastened, unless otherwise indicated.
Anchors, Clips and Window Accessories: Depending on strength and
corrosion -inhibiting requirements, fabricate units of aluminum, non-
magnetic stainless steel, or hot -dip zinc coated steel or iron
complying with ASTM A 386.
Compression Glazing Strips and Weatherstripping: Unless otherwise
indicated, and at m r s option, provide molded neoprene gaskets
r^ complying with AAMA SG-1 or with ASTM D 2000 Designation 2BC415 to
3BC620, or molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Grade 4.
Sliding Weatherstripping: Unless otherwise indicated, provide woven
pile weatherstripping of wool, polypropylene or nylon pile and resin -
impregnated backing fabric, and alum. backing strip; comply with AAMA
701.2
Wire Fabric: Match existing.
Friction Shoes: Nylon or other non-abrasive, non-metallic, non-
staining, non -corrosive durable material.
WINDOW TYPES (OPERATION):
General: The following paragraphs define the operating arrangement for
types of sash (ventilators) required in window units, and specify
r- minimum provisions for each type. The drawings show which panels of
each window unit are operable sash, and which are fixed. Where 2 or
more types of operating sash are included in same window unit,
operation of each is shown, and unit is considered a "Combination
Aluminum Window"
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 8G3-2
Double/Single/Triple-Hung Aluminum Windows: Units containing one or
more balanced vertically -sliding sash; requiring a pair of counter
balancing mechanisms complying with AAMA 902.2 "Sash Balance
Specifications", a pair of lift handles on lower rail of lower sash, a
pair of pull -down handles on bottom of meeting rail of upper sash (if
operable), except substitute a pole socket in upper rail where meeting
rail is more than 6'-0" above floor. Provide latches at meeting rails
to lock sash in closed position.
WINDOW CLASSIFICATION (GRADE):
Residential Windows (Grade B1): Except as otherwise indicated, provide
window units complying with requirements of AAMA Classification B1, for
"Residential" buildings, and complying with the following:
Extruded or formed aluminum removable glazing stops where
indicated, of 0.040" min. wall thickness; otherwise (at
Contractor's option) units may be provided without stops, for face
glazing.
Hardware and anchors of aluminum or other non -corrosive metal.
Separate steel anchors (if used) form contact with aluminum.
Fabricate units with main corners and intersections of frames and
sash mortised and welded or riveted, and sealed by welding or by
application of sealant to prevent leakage. Fabricate secondary
joints similarly, or use concealed mechanical fasteners and
sealants.
Provide metal thickness as required for performance, but not less
than 0.062", tapered to 0.050" for projecting fins, for main sash
and frame units.
Provide means of drainage for water and condensation which may
accumulate in members of window units.
Provide compression weatherstripping at perimeter of each
operating sash, except where rails slide along frame of unit
(sliding or D.H. units).
Provide sliding weatherstripping where sash rails slide
(horizontally or vertically) along frame of unit.
FABRICATION AND ACCESSORIES:
General: Provide mfr's standard fabrication and accessories which
comp y with indicated standards, and are re-glazable without
dismantling of sash framing, except to extent more specific or more
stringent requirements are indicated. Include complete system for
assembly of components and anchorage of window units, and prepare sash
for glazing except where pre -glazing at factory is indicated.
ALUMINUM WINDOW S 8G3-3
Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for window units and profile
requirements are s own on the drawings. Variable dimensions (if any)
are indicated along with max. and min. dimensions as required to
..- achieve design requirements and coordination with other work.
The details shown are based upon standard details by one or more
mfrs. It is intended that similar details by other mfrs. will be
acceptable, provided they comply with the size requirements, and
with minimum/maximum profile requirements as shown.
Coordination of Fabrication: Where possible check actual window
openings in construction work by accurate field measurement before
fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings.
�., However, coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress as
directed by the Contractor to avoid delay of the work. Where
necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and
coordinate installation tolerances to ensure proper fit of window
units.
Provide subframes for window units where required, of profile and
�^ dimensions indicated but not less than 0.062" thickness extruded
aluminum; with mitered or coped corners, welded and dressed smooth or
with concealed mechanical joint fasteners; with anchors; finish to
match window units.
Provide mullions and cover plates as required, matching window units,
and complete with anchors for support to structure and for installation
of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for
movements of window units due to thermal expansion and building
deflections, in manner indicated.
Provide insect screen unit for each operable exterior sash, except as
otherwise indicated. Locate screen units on either inside or outside
of sash, depending upon window type and as shown. Where possible,
design window units and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-
fitting removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and
latches, and without necessity of wickets for hardware access. Where
•— wickets are necessary, provide either sliding or hinged type, framed
and trimmed for durability during handling, and for tight fit.
Fabricate screen frames of either extruded or formed aluminum
tubular -shaped members of 0.040" minimum wall thickness, with
mitered or coped joints and concealed mechanical fasteners, with
removable PVC spline -anchor concealing the edge of the screen
fabric. Finish frames to match window units, unless otherwise
indicated.
At mfr's option, screen frames may be fabricated of non-
magnetic stainless steel members of 0.020" min. wall
thickness. Finish with mfr's standard No. 2B bright mill
finish.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 8G3-4
ALUMINUM WINDOW AND STORM DOOR FINISHES:
Finish aluminum windows and storm doors to match existing.
Natural Anodized Finish: NAAMM AA-C22A31, Class II (minimum thickness
of 0.4mils), natural aluminum color.
Apply temporary protective coating of clear acrylic lacquer,
comply with AAMA 602.2.
PRE -GLAZED FABRICATION:
Pre -glaze window units at the factory where possible and practical for
the applications indicated. Comply with the 8A-Series sections and,
where not indicated, comply with ANSI A 134.1.
EXECUTION:
Comply with mfr's specifications and recommendations for the
installation of window units, hardware, operators, and other components
of the work.
Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames
or sash. Anchor securely in place. Separate aluminum and other
corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at
points of contact with other materials.
Set sill members and other members in a bed of compound as shown, or
with joint fillers or gaskets as shown, to provide weathertight
construction. Refer to 7T-Series sections for compounds, fillers and
gaskets to be installed concurrently with window units. Coordinate
installation with wall flashings and other components of the work.
Compounds, joint fillers and gaskets (if any) to be installed
after the installation of window units are specified in the 7T-
Series sections.
Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact
points and at weatherstripping (if any), for smooth operation and
weathertight closure.
Clean alum. surfaces promptly after installation of windows and storm
doors, exercising care to avoid damage of protective coatings and
finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other
substances. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
Clean glass of pre -glazed units promptly after installation of windows;
comply with requirements of 8A-Series sections for cleaning and
maintenance.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 8G3-5
Advise Contractor of protection and other precautions required through
remainder of construction period, to ensure that window units will be
without damage or deterioration (other than normal weathering) at time
�., of acceptance.
END OF SECTION
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 8G3-6
SECTION 8KO
WOOD DOORS
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
The general provision of the contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any), apply to
the work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent and location of each type of wood door is shown on the
drawings and in schedules sometimes by the abbreviation WdW or other
abbreviations as indicated herein.
The types of doors required include the following:
Solid core flush wood doors with veneer faces.
Hollow core flush wood doors with veneer faces.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
General: Comply with the requirements of the following standards
unless o herwise indicated.
Non -fire Rated Wood Doors: NWMA Industry Standard I.S. 1 "Wood Flush
oors of the National Woodwork Mfr's Assoc.
For exterior doors, factory mark each exterior door with the NW MA
Type I Glue Bond Mark (Red Plug) in addition to the NWMA "Quality
Certified" Seal of Approval.
SURMTTTAI C-
Mfr's Data: Submit door mfr's product data specifications and
installation instructions for each type of wood door required,
including other data as may be required to show compliance with
specified requirements. Transmit copy of each instruction to the
Installer.
Include details of core and edge construction, trim for openings and
louvers (if any) and similar components.
Include finishing specifications for doors to receive factory -applied
shop finish.
Include certifications as may be required to show compliance with
specifications.
Samples:
- WOOD DOORS 8KO-1
Transparent Finished Doors: Submit veneer sheet from each
available flitch to be use for Premium grade face veneers. Also
submit 3 strips of solid wood 3" x 1'-O" of species to be used fo
exposed edges, trim and other solid wood components.
Shop -Finished Doors: Submit 3 samples, 1'-O" square, showing fully
completed shop finish on same veneer and edge construction which will
be used on the shop -finished doors.
Warranty: Submit written agreement in door mfr's standard form signed
yb�ie M fr., Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace
defective doors which have warped (bow, cup or twist) or which show
photographing of construction below in face veneers, or do not conform
to tolerance limitations of NW MA.
The warranty shall also include re -finishing and re -installation which
may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.
Warranty shall be in effect during the follwoing period of time after
the date of acceptance:
Hollow Core Flush Interior Doors: One year.
Solid Core Flush Exterior Doors: Two years.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
Protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent
damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with the "On -Site Care"
recommendations of NWMA pamphlet "Care and finishing of Wood Doors" and
with mfr's instructions.
...� Provide protective coverings for shop -finished doors at the
factory prior to shipping. Use heavy paper cartons and mark with
identification required for proper installation.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS:
General: Provide wood doors complying with the applicable requirements
of NWMAI.S.1 for the kinds and types of doors indicated and as further
specified.
Face Panels: Mfr's standard 2- or 3-ply face panels, unless
oterwise indicated.
Exposed Surfaces: Provide the kind shown or scheduled and as
further specified. Provide same exposed surface material on both
faces of each door, unless otherwise indicated.
WOOD DOORS 8KO-2
EXTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS:
Solid Core Wood Doors, General: Where shown or scheduled, provide
exterior solid core wood door complying with the applicable
requirements of the referenced standards and with the following:
Type 1 adhesive bond.
Core Type: At the Contractor's option, provide continuous wood
block, sti a and rail block, or particleboard, as required by mfr.
to meet the specified warranty period.
Preservative Treatment: Dip -treat exposed wood for not less than 3
minutes in a solution of pentachlorophenol with water repellent
added.
Flashing: Flash bottom of light openings (if any) and top of
outswinging doors (if any) with flexible non -corrosive metal set in
white lead.
Exposed Surfaces for Paint Finish: Where exterior flush wood doors are
s own or scheduled tor paint Ti—n—i—sh provide the following:
Standard thickness rotary cut birch complying with NW MA I.S.1
Sound grade for the face veneers and any species of wood for
exposed edges and other exposed solid wood components.
INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS:
Solid Core Wood Doors:
Type I waterproof bond.
Core Construction: Solid wood block, wood particleboard, or mineral
with woo oc blocks, as required by door mfr. to comply with
specified warranty period.
Face Panels: Mfr's standard 2- or 3-ply face panels.
Exposed Surfaces for Paint Finish: Where solid core interior wood
doors are shown or scheduled to receive a paint finish, provide the
following:
At the contractor's option, provide either medium density over -lay
complying with PS-1 applied over mfr's standard thickness hardwood
face veneers; or standard thickness, rotary -cut birch face veneers
complying with NW MA I.S.1 Good grade. Provide any close -grain
hardwood for exposed edges and other exposed solid wood
components.
WOOD DOORS 8KO-3
Exposed Surfaces for Transparent Finish: Where solid core interior
wood doors are shown or scheduled to receive a transparent finish,
Provide mfr's standard thickness face veneers of the following quality.
Quality: NWMA I.S.1 Premium grade face veneers of the species and
cut shown or scheduled. Book -match (match for color and grain) at
veneer joints, unless otherwise indicated. Provide exposed edges
and other exposed solid wood components of the same species as
.,. face veneers.
Hollow Core Wood Doors:
Core Construction: Any type of core complying with the requirements of
or hollow core flush doors.
Face Panels: Mfr's standard 2 or 3-ply face panels.
Exposed Surfaces for Transparent Finish: Where hollow core interior
wood doors are shown or scheduled receive a transparent finish,
provide mfr's standard thickness face veneers of the following quality.
Quality: NWMA I.S.1 Premium grade face veneers of the species and
-- cut shown or scheduled. Book -match (match for color and grain) at
veneer joints, unless otherwise indicated. Provide exposed edges
and other exposed solid wood components of the same species as
face veneers.
SHOP FINISH:
Comply with recommendation of AWI for factory finishing of doors,
including final sanding with No. 6/0 finishing paper immediately before
the first application of finishing materials.
Provide finishies as shown or scheduled and as specified in 9T-
Series sections of these specifications.
PREFITTING AND PREPARATION FOR HARDWARE:
Prefit and premachine wood doors at the factory.
Comply with the tolerance requirements of NWMA for prefitting. Machine
doors for hardware requiring cutting of doors. Comply with final
—. hardware schedules and door frame shop drawings and with hardware
templates and other essential information required to ensure proper fit
of doors and hardware.
EXECUTION
INSPECTION:
WOOD DOORS
8KO-4
Installer must examine door frames and verify that frames are the
correct type and have been installed as required for proper hanging of
corresponding doors and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely installation of wood doors. Do
not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
INSTALLATION:
Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area
prior to hanging.
Hardware: For installation see 8S-Series sections of these
specifications.
Mfr's Instructions: Install wood doors in accordance with mfr's
instructions and as shown.
Job Fit Doors: Align doors to frame for proper fit and uniform
c earance at each edge and machine for hardware. Seal cut surfaces
after fitting and machining.
Bevel fire -rated doors 1/16" in 2" at lock edge.
Prefit Doors: Fit to -frames and machine for hardware to whatever
extent not previously worked at factory as required for proper fit and
uniform clearance at each edge.
Clearance: For non -fire doors provide clearances of 1/ 8" at jambs and
heads; at meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 1/ 2" from bottom
of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold
is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4" clearance from bottom of door to
top of threshold.
Job Site Finished Doors: See painting sections of these specs. for
requirements for inis ing wood doors.
ADJUST AND CLEAN:
Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate
r eTy, as directed by the Architect.
Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation,
as directed Uy—the Architect.
Protection and Completed Work: Advise Contractor of proper procedures
required for protection o installed wood doors from damage or
deterioration until acceptance of the work.
END OF SECTION
WOOD DOORS 8KO-5
F-1 SECTION 8S0
BUILDERS HARDWARE
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
.. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Definition: "Builders Hardware" includes items known commercially as
-� builders dware which are required for swing, sliding and folding
doors, except special types of unique and non -matching hardware
specified in the same section as the door and door frame.
The required types of builders hardware include (but are not
necessarily limited to) the following:
Butts and hinges
Lock cylinders and keys
Lock and latch sets
Bolts
Stripping and seals
Thresholds
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Acceptable Designs: The last article of this section indicates
Products which are of acceptable design for primary exposure (lock
sets, etc.). Do not change the selection of products, except with
Architect's acceptance.
Manufacturer: Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and lock sets,
hinges,c1zs-Lsrs, etc.) from only one manufacturer, although several my
be indicated as offering products complying with requirements.
Supplier: A recognized builders hardware supplier who has been
furnishing hardware in the project's vicinity for a period of not less
than 2 years, and who is, or employs an experienced hardware consultant
who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the work,
for consultation about project's hardware requirements, to Owner,
Architect and Contractor.
Departures From Scheduled Designations: Except as otherwise indicated,
e use of one m r s numeric designation system in schedules does not
imply that another mfr's products will not be acceptable, unless they
are not acceptable in design, or not equal in size, weight, finish,
function, or other quality of significance. However, do not change the
selection after Architect's acceptance of hardware supplier's completed
hardware schedule.
BUILDERS HARDWARE 8SO-1
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit mfr's technical information for each item of
hardware. nclude whatever information may be necessary to show
compliance with requirements, and include instructions for installation
and for maintenance of operating parts and finish. Wherever needed,
furnish templates to fabricators of other work which is to recieve
finish hardware. Transmit copy of applicable data to the Installer.
Hardware Schedule: Submit 5 copies of the hardware schedule in manner
and format specified, complying with the actual construction progress
schedule requirements (for each draft). Hardware schedules are
intended for coordination of work. Review and acceptance by the
Architect or Owner does not relieve the Contractor of his exclusive
responsibility to fulfill the requirements as shown and specified.
Include a separate key schedule, showing clearly how the Owner's final
instructions on keying of locks have been fulfilled.
Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on builders hardware indicated,
organized har ware sc e u e into "hardware sets" indicating complete
designations of every item required for each door or opening. Furnish
initial draft of schedule at the earliest possible date, in order to
facilitate the fabrication of other work (such as hollow metal frames)
which may be crucial in the project construction schedule. Furnish
final draft of schedule after samples, mfr's product data sheets,
coordination with sop drawings for other work, delivery schedules and
similar information has been completed and accepted.
PRODUCT HANDLING:
Packaging of hardware, on a set by set basis, is the responsibility of
the supplier. As material is received by the hardware supplier form
the various mfrs, sort and repackage in containers marked with the
hardware set number. Two or more identical sets may be packed in the
same container.
Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of the hardware
supplier and the hardware installer until each is satisfied that the
count is correct.
JOB CONDITIONS:
Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Tag each item or
package separately, with identification related to the final hardware
schedule, and include basic installation instruction in the package.
Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of
the thicknesses, profile, swing, security and similar requirements
indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function. Deliver
individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper
locations (shop or project site) for installation.
BUILDERS HARDWARE 8SO-2
P_
Templates: Furnish hardware templates- to: each fabricator of doors,
frames and other work to be factory -prepared for the installation of
hardware. Upon request, check the shop drawings of such other work, to
confirm that adequate provisions are made for the proper installation
A- of hardware.
PRODUCTS
The cost of installation and handling of hardware at the project site
or other component fabrication location is not included in the
allowance. Also, the costs of preparing the hardware schedule and
furnishing templates and other required information and samples are not
included in the allowance. The costs of finishes, fasteners, and
Owner's hardware maintenance tools, are included in the allowance.
HARDWARE SCHEDULE:
The requirements for material, type, grade, size and function of
builders hardware items is indicated by scheduled designation numbers.
Hardware Designation Numbers: Particular mfr's product numbers, as
specified or otherwise noted (except as otherise indicated).
Hardware Designation Numbers: Federal Specification numbers, taken
rom FEi FF-R-Iub,- - , FS FF-H-121 and FS FF-H-116. Comply
with the general provisions of applicable Federal Specifications.
MATERIALS AND FABRICATION:
General:
Hand of Door: The drawings show the direction of slide, swing or hand
ot each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper
installation and operation of the door movement as shown.
Base Metals: Produce hardware units of the basic metal and forming
method iimated, using the mfr's standard metal alloy, composition,
temper and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized)
quality than specified for the applicable hardware units by FS FF-H-
106, FS FF-G-111, FS FF-H-116 and FS FF-H-121. Do not furnish
"optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as
otherwise specified.
Fasteners: Manufacture hardware to conform to published templates,
generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide
hardware which has been prepared for self -tapping sheet metal screws,
except as specifically indicated.
Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. Provide
Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish
exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match the hardware
BUILDERS HARDWARE
N
8SO-3
finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match the finish of
such other work as closely as possible, including "prepared for paint"
in surfaces to receive painted finish.
Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when
the door is closed, except to the extent no standard units of the type
specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use through
bolts for installation where the bolt head or the nut on the opposite
face is exposed in other work, except where it is not feasible to
adequately reinforce the work.
Tools for Maintenance: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools as
needed or Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and
replacement of builders hardware.
HINGES, BUTTS AND PIVOTS:
Templates and Screws: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed
entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only
template -produced units.
Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as
ollows:
Steel Hinges: Steel pins.
Interior Doors: Non -rising pins.
Tips: lat utton and matching plug, finished to match leaves,
except where hosiptal tip (HT) indicated.
LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING:
General: Supplier will meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements
an o ain final instructions in writing.
Existing System: Grandmasterkey the locks to the Owner's existing
system, with a new masterkey for the project.
Equip locks with mfr's standard 6-pin tumbler cylinders.
Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass/bronze, stainless
s ee or nickel silver.
Comply with the Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as
otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock which
is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks.
Key Material: Provide keys of nickle silver only.
Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock; 5 master keys for
each master system; and 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system.
Deliver keys to Owner's representative.
BUILDERS HARDWARE 8SO-4
LOCKS, LATCHES AND BOLTS:
Strikes: Provide mfr's standard wrought box strike for each latch or
lock o t, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match
hardware set.
Provide standard (open) strike plates for interior doors of
residential units where wood door frames are used.
Lock Throw: Provide 5/8" minimum throw of latch and deadbolt used on
pairs of doors. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and
latch bolts on rated fire openings.
Provide 1/ 2" minimum throw on other latch and deadlock bolts.
Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/ 2" diameter rods of brass, bronze or
stainless steel, with minimum 12" long rod.
DOOR TRIM UNITS:
Fasteners: Provide mfr's standard exposed fasteners for door trim
units; either machine screws or self -tapping screw.
STRIPPING AND SEALS:
Continuity of Stripping: Except as otherwise indicated, it is required
that the stripping at each opening be continuous and without
unnecessary interruptions at door corners and hardware.
Replaceable Seal Strips: It is required that the resilient or flexible
sea strip of every unit be easily replaceable and readily available
from stocks maintained by the mfr.
Weatherstripping: Provide types of weatherstripping indicated,
properly prepared for attachment to supporting units.
Provide interlocking metal weatherstripping at jambs and head, surface
applied unless shown as mortised or semi -mortised, of the following
metal, finish and seal:
Extruded aluminum, with natural anodized finish; 0.062" minimum
thickness of main walls and flanges.
Equip stripping with closed -cell sponge neoprene seal in
pocket of the interlock.
Closed -cell extruded sponge neoprene with ribbed face of 5/8"
contact width.
Provide threshold -contact type weatherstripping at door bottom,
including resilient insert and metal housing of the design and size
.� shown; of the following metal, finish and resilient seal strip:
BUILDERS HARD14ARE 8SO-5
Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish; 0.062" minimum —
thickness of main walls and flanges.
Flexible vinyl loop or fingered seal strip.
Equip stripping with closed -cell sponge neoprene seal in the
pocket of the interlock.
THPPSH(ll n'S-
Metal: Extruded aluminum, smooth commercial finish.
Surface Pattern: Plain tread.
Width: As indicated, but not less than 4" if not otherwise indicated.
Minimum Thicknesses: Produce units with the indicated minimum
thicknesses, exc usive of surface pattern grooves.
Extrusions: 0.125" for direct tread surfaces, 0.10" for
secondary tread surfaces, and 0.0625" for unexposed flanges and
legs.
Construction: Single -piece or multiple -piece construction at
Contractor s option, complying with mfr's recommendations.
Profile: Provide mfr's standard unit which conforms with the minimum
size and profile requirements as shown or otherwise indicated.
For exterior doors, provide profile designed to form a weather
seal, of the appropriate type for the swing of door.
For swing -in doors provide hook -bar and drain channel to
minimize infiltration of moisture and air.
Seal: Provide units with integral, replaceable, resilient
weatTierstripping of extruded neoprene or vinyl.
Weatherstrip Inserts: Fabricate units to include mfr's standard
replaceable resilient weatherstrip seal of the following type, located
to form contact with door when closed.
Seal: Hollow neoprene insert strip.
HARDWARE FINISHES:
Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening,
to the greatest extent possible, and except as otherwise indicated.
Reduce differences in color and textures as much as commercially
possible where the base metal or metal forming process is different for
individual units of hardware exposed at the same door or opening. In
BUILDERS HARDWARE 8SO-6
general, match items to the mfr's standard finish for the latch and
lock set (or push-pull units if no latch -lock sets) for color and
texture.
Provide finishes which match those established by BHMA or, if none
established, match the existing building's hardware finish.
Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating
(if any), composition, hardness and other qualities complying with
mfr's standards, but in no case less than specified for the applicable
units of hardware by FS FF-H-106, FS FF-H-111, FS FF-H-116, FS FF-H-
121.
Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of
�., brass, bronze and aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix
"-NL" is used with standard finish designations to indicated "no
lacquer".
The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicated hardware
finishes are the industry -recognized standard commercial finishes,
except as otherwise noted.
EXECUTION
-.0 INSTALLATION:
Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for
Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and
Hardware Institute, except as specifically indicated or required to
comply with governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise
directed by Architect.
Install each hardware item in compliance with the mfr's instructions
and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to
install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or
finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation
or application of surface protections with finishing work specified in
the Division-9 sections. Do not install surface -mounted items until
finishes have been completed on the substrate.
Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and
reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation
and operation.
Drill and countersink units which are not factory -prepared for
anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with
industry standards.
Cut and fit threshold and floor covers to profile of door frames, with
mitered corners and hair -line joints join units with concealed welds or
concealed mechanical joints. Cut smooth openings for spindles, bolts
and similar items, if any.
BUILDERS HARDWARE 8SO-7
r-
Screw thresholds to substrate with No. 10 or larger screws, of the
proper type for permanent anchorage and of bronze or stainless steel
which will not corrode in contact with the threshold metal.
At exterior doors, and elsewhere as indicated, set each edge of
threshold in a seal strip butyl rubber sealant or polyisobutylene
mastic sealant.
ADJUST AND CLEAN:
Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which
cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the
application made.
Final Adjustment: Whereve hardware installation is made more than one
moth prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or are, return to the
work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make final
check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area.
Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and
finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to
compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of
hardware and hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of
hardware.
HARDWARE SCHEDULE:
HW 1: OPG No. 1:
Each door to have:
1 1/2 pr Hager Butts
1 ea. Russwin Lockset
1 ea. Russwin Dead Lock
1 ea. Trimco Stop
1 set Pemko Weatherstripping
1 ea. Pemko Sweep
1 ea. Pemko Threshold
HW 2: OPG No. 2:
Each door to have:
Butts by Door Supplier
1279 4.5 x 4.5
434D Ashford
1413
W 1274 CCS
297AV x 17'
315AN x 3'-0"
170A x 3'-O"
1 ea Russwin
Privacy set
4320 Ashford
1 ea Russwin
Closure
KR9120
1 ea Trimco
Kickplate
10" x DW-2"
1 ea Trimco
Stop
W1274CCS
3 ea Trimco
Silencers
1229B
BUILDERS HARDWARE 8SO-8
HW 3: OPG No's 3,4,5, & 6:
Each door to have:
-� Butts by Door Supplier
1 ea. Russwin Lockset 4340 Ashford
1 ea. Trimco Stop W1274CCS
.., 3 ea. Trimco Silencers 1229E
HW 4 : OPG No. 7 :
Each door to have:
All hardware by door supplier
HW 5: Finish or hardware to match existing.
END OF SECTION
BUILDERS HARDWARE 8SO-9
SECTION 9DO
GYP SUM DRWAUE
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any) apply to the
work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of the gypsum drywall work (GypDw) is shown on the drawings
and in schedules, and is hereby defined to include gypsum board work
with a tape -and -compound joint treatment system known as "drywall
finishing" work.
The types of work required include the following:
Gypsum drywall applied to wood framing and furring.
Gypsum backing boards for application of other finishes.
Drywall finishing (joint tape -and -compound treatment).
Refer to 6E Series sections for wood framing & furring.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Industry Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of GA-216
pp ication and Finishing of Gypsum Board" by the Gypsum Association,
except where more detailed or more stringent requirements are indicated
including the recommendations of the manufacturer.
Allowable Tolerances: 1/8" offsets between planes of board faces, and
in - or p umb, level, warp and bow.
CIIRMTTTALS:
Manufacturer's Data, Gypsum Drywall: For information only, submit 2
copies of manufacturer's pro uct specifications and installation
instructions for each gypsum drywall component, including other data as
may be required to show compliance with these specifications.
Distribute an additional copy of each installation instruction to the
Installer.
PRODUCT HANDLING:
Deliver gypsum drywall materials in sealed containers and bundles,
fully identified with manufacturer's name, brand, type and grade; store
in a dry, well ventilated space, protected from the weather, under
cover and off the ground.
GYPSUM DRYWALL 9DO-1
� JOB CONDITIONS:
Installer must examine the substrates and the spaces to receive gypsum
drywall, and the conditions under which gypsum drywall is to be
installed; and shall notify the Contractor, in writing, of conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
Maintain ambient temperatures at not less than 55 degrees F., for the
period of 24 hours before drywall finishing, during installation and
until compounds are dry.
PRODUCTS
GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS:
-^ General: To the extent not otherwise indicated, comply with GA-216 as
specs led and recommended.
P_
Gypsum Backing Board : Regular type, with V-groove or square edges,
except prove a exposed gypsum board with tapered edges where joint
treatment is required.
Thickness: 5/8", except where otherwise indicated.
Water -Resistant Type: Provide where indicated; 5/ 8" thick, except
where otherwise in icated.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS:
General: ASTM C 475; type recommended by the manufacturer for the
app station indicated, except as otherwise indicated.
Joint Tape: Perforated type.
Joint Compound: Ready -mixed vinyl -type for interior use.
Grade: A single multi -purpose grade, for entire application.
Joint Compound: On interior work provide chemical -hardening -type for
bedding an filling, ready -mixed vinyl -type or non -casein -type for
topping.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall work of the
type -and grade recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum board.
Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound specifically
recommended or laminating gypsum boards.
GYPSUM DRYWALL
Fastening Adhesive (for Wood): ASTM C 557.
Gypsum Board Fasteners: Comply with GA-216.
Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Mastic type; non -shrinking, non-drying,
non -migrating and non -staining.
Exposed Acoustical Sealant: Latex, acrylic, or acrylic -latex type;
permanently elastic an paintable.
Sound Attenuation Batts: FS HH-I-521, Type I; semi -rigid mineral fiber
blanket without mem rane, Class 25 flame -spread, thicknesses as
indicated.
EXECUTION
GENERAL GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:
Pre -Installation Conference: Meet at the project site with the
installers ot re ated wor and review the coordination and sequencing
of work to ensure that everything to be concealed by gypsum drywall has
been accomplished, and that chases, access panels, openings,
supplementary framing and blocking and similar provisions have been
completed.
Install sound attenuation batts as indicated, prior to gypsum board
unless readily installed after board has been installed.
General Standards: In addition to compliance with GA-216, comply with
manu ac urer s instructions and requirements for fire -resistance
ratings (if any), whichever is most stringent.
Install ceiling boards in the direction and manner which will minimize
the number of end -butt joints, and which will avoid end joints in the
central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least V -0".
Install wall/partition boards vertically to avoid end -butt joints
wherever possible. At stairwells and similar high walls,"install
boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs.
Form control joints (CtrJt) and expansion joints (ExpJt) with space
between edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories.
Isolate perimeter of non -load -bearing drywall partitions at structural
abutments. Provide 1/4" to 1/2" space and trim edge with J-type semi -
finishing edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant. Do not
fasten drywall directly to stud system runner tracks.
Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended by
manu ac urer, insta-"n gypsum board with "floating" internal corner
construction, unless isolation of the intersecting boards is indicated
or unless control or expansion joints are indicated.
GYPSUM DRYWALL 9DO-3
Space fasteners in gypsum 'boards in accordance with GA-216 and
manufacturer's recommendations, except as otherwise indicated.
SPECIAL GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATIONS:
Single -Layer Ceilings: Install exposed gypsum board prior to
wall/partition boar installation.
Fasten with screws, or with nails where permitted.
,.. Single -Layer Walls and Partitions: Install exposed gypsum board.
Fasten with screws, or with nails where permitted.
a^�
Wall Tile Base: Where drywall is base for thin -set ceramic tile
and similar rigid applied wall finishes, install gypsum backing
board.
At showers, tubs and similar "wet" areas,install water-
resistant backing board. Apply with un-cut long edge at
bottom of work, and space 1/4" above fixture lips. Seal
ends, cut -edges and penetrations of each piece with water-
resistant sealant before installation.
INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES:
General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim
accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports.
Otherwise, fasten flanges by nailing or stapling in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
Install metal corner beads at external corners of drywall work.
Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise
be exposed or semi -exposed, and except where plastic trim is indicated.
Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound except where
semi -finishing type is indicated. Install L-type trim where work is
tightly abutted to other work, and install special kerf-type where
other work is kerfed to receive long leg of L-type trim. Install U-
type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant -filled
(including expansion joints).
Install J-type semi -finishing trim where indicated, and where
exterior gypsum board edges are not covered by applied moldings.
INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL FINISHING:
General: Apply treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions),
anges of trim accessories, penetrations, fasteners heads, surface
defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration.
Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, using type of
compound recommended by manufacturer.
GYPSUM DRYWALL 9DO-4
Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where a
trim accessory is indicated.
Apply joint compound in 3 coats (not including prefill of openings
in base), and sand between last 2 coats and after last coat.
Base for Ceramic Tile: Do not install drywall finishing where ceramic
tile and similar rigid applied finishes are indicated.
Partial Finishing: Omit third coat (if specified) and sanding on
concealed drywall work which is indicated for drywall finishing,
including sound, fire, air and smoke -rated work.
PROTECTION OF WORK:
Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for protection
of the gypsum drywall work from damage and deterioration during the
remainder of the construction period.
END OF SECTION
GYPSUM DRYWALL 9DO-5
SECTION 9GO
TILE WORK
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any), apply to
the work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of tile work is shown on drawings and in schedules.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Manufacturing Standards: Furnish tile conforming with Standard Grade
requirements o .1.
When using setting and grouting materials manufactured under TCA
license, include identification together with formula on each
container.
Provide materials obtained from only one source for each type and color
of tile.
Proprietary Materials: Handle, store, mix and apply proprietary
setting and grouting materials in compliance with manufacturer's
instructions.
SURMTTTAI S
Manufacturer's Data; Tile Work: For information only, submit 2 copies
of manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions
for all materials required, except bulk materials. Include
certifications and other data as may be required to show compliance
with these specifications. Transmit a copy of each instruction to the
Installer.
Samples; Tile Work: Submit 3 samples of each type and color of tile
required, not Tess than 12" square on plywood or hardboard backing, and
grouted. Also, submit one full-size sample of each tile accessory and
two 6" long samples of marble threshold. Submit samples of trim and
—� other units if requested by Architect. Review will be for color,
pattern, and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is
the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
Certification; Tile Work: Furnish Master Grade Certificate for each
type of tile, signed by manufacturer and Installer.
^� DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
TILE WORK 9GO-1
Deliver packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken
and labels intact until time of use, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS:
Glazed Wall Tile: Size, and pattern as shown; cushion edge units,
except where square edge units are indicated.
Color: As selected by Architect from mfr. standard colors.
Finish: Bright glaze (BG), where indicated.
Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Size, color and pattern as shown; all-purpose
edge units. Factory mount tile onto sheets with mesh, dot, net, or
other backing method.
Slip -Resistant Units: Same as ceramic mosaics, with the addition
o - o a rasive grain by weight.
Color: As selected by Architect from mfr. standard colors.
Trim Shapes: As required for complete installation, of same material,
size, color, and finish of field tile.
Organic Adhesive: ANSI A 136.1, with tile Contractor's Association of
merica or Adhesive and Sealant Council certification of conformance.
Commercial Cement Grout: Proprietary compound of portland cement and
additives,factory-blended to decrease shrinkage and increase moisture
resistance.
Products offered by manufacturers to comply with the requirements
for modified portland cement grout include the following:
Hydroment Ceramic Tile Grout; Upco Chem./USM Corp.
L&M Acid-R Grout; L&M-Surco Mfg. Inc.
EXECUTION
MWFUTON:
Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which tile work
is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
TILE WORK 9GO-2
INSTALLATION:
General: Compply with ANSI standard installation specifications A108.1
rough A108.7 except as otherwise indicated. Maintain minimum
temperature limits and installation practices as recommended by
proprietary mortar and grout materials manufacturer.
Extend tile work into recesses and under equipment and fixtures, to
form a complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise
shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners
without disruption of pattern or joint alignments.
Comply with the manufacturer's instructions for mixing and installation
of proprietary materials.
Neutralize and seal substrates in accordance with mortar or adhesive
manufacturer's instructions.
Use organic adhesive setting bed only on clean, smooth, flat
plaster walls and gypsum wall board.
Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern.
Align joints wen adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls and trim are
the same size. Layout tile work and center tile fields both directions
in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting.
Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise shown.
Placement: Comply with applicable requirements of the specified
standards for installation.
Portland cement mortar set glazed wall tile: ANSI A108.1.
Organic adhesive set wall and floor tile: ANSI A108.4.
P' Grout: Use commercial cement grout for grouting tile wall joints,
un ess otherwise shown.
Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic
i�'Te surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.
Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by
the tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but not sooner
than 14 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron and
vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush the
surface with clean water before and after cleaning.
Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of
cracked, c ippe roken, unbonded, or otherwise defective tile work.
TILE WORK 9GO-3
Protection: When recommended by the tile manufacturer, apply a
potective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls
and floors. Protect installed tile work with Kraft paper or other
heavy covering during the construction period to prevent damage and
wear.
Prohibit all foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors for at
least 3 days, preferably 7 days.
Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral
cleaner from all tile surfaces.
END OF SECTION
TILE WORK 9GO-4
SECTION 9NO
RESILIENT FLOORING
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any), apply to
the work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of resilient flooring and accessories is shown on the
-- drawings and in schedules.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Wherever possible, provide resilient flooring and accessories produced
by a single manufacturer.
SUBMITTALS:
Manufacturer's Data; Resilient Flooring: For information only, submit
Z copies ot manu ac urer s technical data and installation instructions
for each type of resilient flooring and accessory. Transmit a copy of
each installation instruction to the Installer.
Samples; Resilient Flooring: Submit 3 sets of samples of each type,
color and finishof resilient flooring and accessory required. Provide
full-size the units and 12" square samples of sheet flooring and 6"
long sample of accessory. Include full range of flooring color and
pattern variation. Sample submittals will be reviewed for color
texture and pattern only. Compliance with all other requirements is
the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
Maintenance Instructions; Resilient Flooring: Submit 2 copies of
�.: manufacturer s written instructions for recommended maintenance
practices for each type of resilient flooring and accessories.
Replacement Material; Resilient Floors: After completion of work,
deliver rep acement materials tote project site, as follows:
Tile flooring, not less than one box for each 50 boxes, or
fraction thereof, for each type, size, and color installed.
Furnish replacement materials from the same manufactured lot as the
materials installed.
JOB CONDITIONS:
RESILIENT FLOORING 9NO-1
Continuously heat areas to receive flooring to 70 degrees F. for at
least 48 hours prior to installation, when project conditions are such
that heating is required. Maintain 70 degrees F. temperature
continuously during and after installation as recommended by flooring
manufacturer, but for not less than 48 hours.
PRODUCTS
COLORS AND PATTERNS:
Provide colors and patterns as shown or scheduled, or as selected by
Architect from manuffacturer's standards.
TILE FLOORING:
Vinyl Tile: FS SS-T-312, Type III, 12" X 12" X 1/ 8" gage, unless
otherwise indicated.
EXECUTION
INSPECTION:
Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which resilient
flooring and accessories are to be installed and notify the Contractor
in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to
the Installer.
PREPARATION:
Prior to laying flooring, broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered
and inspect subfloor. Start of flooring installation indicates
acceptance of subfloor conditions and full responsibility for completed
work.
Use leveling compound as recommended by flooring manufacturer for
filling small cracks and depressions in subfloors.
Perform moisture tests on concrete slabs to determine that
concrete surfaces are sufficiently cured and ready to receive
flooring.
Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring
manufacturer prior to application of adhesive. Apply in
compliance with manufacturer.'s directions.
INSTALLATION:
General: Install flooring after finishing operations, including
pain ing, have been completed and permanent heating system is
RESILIENT FLOORING 9NO-2
Gig
-, operating. Moisture content of concrete slabs, building air
temperature and relative humidity must be within limits recommended by
flooring manufacturer.
Place flooring with adhesive cement in strict compliance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Butt tightly to vertical surfaces,
thresholds, nosings and edgings. Scribe around obstructions and to
produce neat joints, laid tight, even, and straight. Extend flooring
into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and similar openings.
-- Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or
plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as
marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other non -permanent marking device.
Tightly cement flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising
and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or
other surface imperfections.
Tile Floors: Lay tile from center marks established with principal
walls, d csi ounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of the
,�. room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut
widths less than 1/ 2 tile at room perimeters. Lay tile square to room
axis, unless otherwise shown.
Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile fromcartonsin same
sequence as manufactured and packaged. Cut tile neatly to and around
all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped or deformed tile are not
�. acceptable.
Lay tile in "Checkerboard" fashion with grain reversed in
alternate tile.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using neutral
type cleaners as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Protect
installed flooring from damage by covering.
Finishing: After completion of project and just prior to final
inspec ion of work, thoroughly clean floor and accessories.
Apply wax and buff, with type of wax, number of coats and buffing
procedures in compliance with flooring manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
RESILIENT FLOORING 9NO-3
.-,
SECTION 9RO
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to the work
specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of each type of carpeting is indicated on the drawings, and
includes carpet, cushion and accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Installer: Firm with not less than 2 years of carpeting experience,
simi ar to work of this section.
Manufacturer: Firm with not less than 5 years of production experience
with carpet similar to types specified in this section; and whose
published product literature clearly indicates compliance of product
with requirements of this section.
General Standard: Comply with recommendation of "Carpet Specifier's
Handbook" y The Carpet and Rug Institute, which can be reasonably
applied to types of carpeting required.
HUD Certification: Comply with "Use of Materials Bulletin UM-440 by
and with procedures for "Certification by a HUD -Approved
Admi ni st rat or".
Overrun: Where carpet is supplied from custom run at mill, provide 5%
overrun on calculated yardage (carpet needed for proper installation
including waste and excess usable scraps).
Maintenance Materials: Deliver specified overrun (if any) and usable
scraps of carpe to wner's designated storage space, properly packaged
and identified. Usable scraps are defined to include roll ends of less
than 9'-0" length, and pieces of more than 3 sq. ft. area and more than
8" wide. Dispose of smaller pieces.
SUBMITTALS:
Manufacturer's Data: Submit data to show compliance with requirements.
Include test IaEbratory reports and mfr's certifications and
installation/maintenance instructions and recommendations.
CARPETING 9RO-1
-� Samples: Submit 18" X 27" samples of each carpet required, and 6"
lengths of exposed edge stripping, and 6" squares of separate cushions.
PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver carpeting materials in
protective wrapping, and store inside, protected from weather, moisture
and soiling.
WARRANTY: Provide special warranty, signed by Contractor, Installer
and Mfr. (Carpet Mill), agreeing to repair or replace defective
materials and workmanship of carpeting work during 1-year warranty
f— period following acceptance. Attach copies of product warranties.
PRODUCTS:
CARPET:
Carpet Fiber (Filament):
r
Hollow Nylon: Mfr's standard delustered nylon filament of standard
denier wi multiple hollow cores, bulked continuous filament (BCF)
unless indicated as "staple".
Carpet Face Yarn:
~" Carpet Color, Pattern, Texture:
Fade Resistance: Laboratory tested or certified by mfr. to be 4 for 40
^hrs., or Fetter-, AATCC 16E.
Dying Method: Where synthetic filament is indicated for carpet face
yarn, provide solution dyed filament.
Color: As selected by the Architect from mfr. standard colors.
Carpet Construction:
Type: Tufted cut pile.
�- a� u ge : 1/ 10" (39.4/ 10cm) .
Stitch s per Inch: 12.9 ( 50.8/ 10cm).
File Height (approx.): 5/16" (7.94mm).
aceYarn: y on.
Yarn Ply— 2-ply.
Yarn Weig t as tufted: 30.0 oz./sq.yd. (1017g/m2).
Backing Materials: rimary - Conductive synthetic. Secondary -
Jute (natural .
Total Weight: 69 oz./sq.yd. (2340g/m2).
Carpet Flammability:
Pill Test: Provide carpet which passes the flammability test of ASTM D
F-1-70).
CARPET CUSHIONS:
CARPETING 9RO-2
General: Provide mfr's standard carpet cushion of type, weight and
7TTi'�cc e s indicated. Refer to drawings for space -to -space variations
(if any) in carpet cushion requirements. Provide cushion which passes
pill test for flammability, ASTM D 2859 (DOC FF-1-70).
Rippled_ sponge Rubber Carpet Cushion: Rippled surface sponge rubber
sheet with top ace of fabric or o—f er smooth sheet; FS ZZ-C-00811.
CARPET ACCESSORIES:
Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water -resistance plywood strips, either
or 9 L thick as required to match cushion thickness, with
angular pins protruding from top designed to grip and hold stretched
carpet at the backing. Provide narrow stripping with 2 rows of pins
where stretched width of carpet is 20' or less; wide stripping with 3
rows of pins where carpet width exceeds 20'.
Carpet Edge Guard, Metal: Extruded aluminum bend -down type edge guard,
With concealed gripper teeth and punched anchorage flange; anodized
aluminum finish of colors selected by Architect from among standard
colors available within the industry (any mfr.).
Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by mfrs of carpet, and other
carpeting products; and as selected by Installer to meet project
circumstance and requirements.
EXECUTION
PRE -INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: Installer must examine substrates for
moisture content and of er conditions under which carpeting is to be
installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental
to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from surfaces to
receive carpeting; vacuum clean immediately before installation. Check
concrete surfaces to ensure no "dusting" through installed carpet;
apply sealer where required to prevent dusting.
Sequence carpeting with other work
damage and soiling of carpet during
period.
INSTALLATION:
so as to minimize the possibility of
the remainder of the construction
General: Comply with mfr's instructions and recommendations for seam
locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of direction and
lay of pile. At doors, center seams under doors; do not seam in
traffic direction at doorways.
Extend carpet under open -bottomed obstructions and under removable
flanges and furnishings, and into alcoves and closets of each space.
CARPETING 9RO-3
r^ Provide cut-outs where required, and bind cut edges properly where not
concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges.
Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor
guards to substrate.
Stretch-in-Tackless Installation: Install tackless carpet stripping
with adhesive or by nailing, or both where required for adequate
strength. Locate properly for concealment of carpet edge between
stripping and base of wall. Strip entire perimeter of each carpeted
-- space, and where possible at obstructions and cutouts.
Install cushion of type indicated in each space to be carpeted. Run
seams at 90 degree angle with carpet seams. Place cushion with faric
covered or smoothest face up. Apply 2" fabric -type adhesive tape on
cushion seams. Cement cushion to substrate in manner recommended by
mfr., except staple to wood substrates (if any).
Install carpet by trimming edges, buttering cuts with seaming cement,
taping or sewing or taping -and -sewing seams to provide sufficient
�., strength fro stretching and continued stresses during life of carpet.
Apply seaming cement over stitching on backing, if not covered by tape.
Stretch carpet both directions, the exact amount recommended by carpet
mfr.; trim edges, secure to stripping, and conceal behind edge of
stripping. Use power stretchers where sufficient space is available to
opeate stretchers properly.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION: Remove debris, sorting pieces to be saved
rom scraps to disposed of.
Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face -beater element.
Remove spots and replace carpet where spots cannot be removed.
�-^ Advise Contractor of protection methods and materials needed to ensure
that carpeting will be without deterioration or damage at time of
acceptance.
Re -stretching: Return to installation after approx. 6 months,of
occupancy and use; restretch carpet in each space, repair faults in
seaming, trim and adjust carpeting at edges.
END OF SECTION
CARPETING
9RO-4
SECTION 9TO
PAINIINU
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any), apply to
the work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of painting work is shown on the drawings and schedules, and as
herein specified.
The work included painting and finishing of interior and exterior
exposed items and surfaces throughout the project, except as otherwise
indicated.
Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in
addition to shop -priming and surface treatment specified under
other sections of the work.
The work includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and
ducts (including color coding), and of hangers, exposed steel and iron
work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under the
mechanical and electrical work, except as otherwise indicated.
"Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including
primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other
applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats.
Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in
"schedules", except where the natural finish of the material is
specifically noted as a surface not to be painted. Where items or
surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint these the same as
adjacent similar materials or areas. If color or finish is not
designated, the Architect will select these from standard colors
available for the materials systems specified.
PAINTING NOT INCLUDED:
The following categories of work are not included as part of the field -
applied finish work, or are included in other sections of these
specifications.
Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous
metal items is included under the various sections for structural
steel, miscellaneous metal, hollow metal work, and similar items.
Also, shop -fabricated or factory -built mechanical and electrical
equipment or accessories.
PAINTING 9TO-1
Pre -finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include
painting whenfactory-finishing or installer finishing is specified for
such items as (but not limited to) metal toilet enclosures, prefinished
partition systems, acoustic materials, architectural woodwork and
casework, finished mechanical and electrical equipment including light
fixtures, switchgear and distribution cabinets, elevator entrance
�^ frames, doors and equipment.
Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not
required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and
generally inaccessible areas, foundation spaces, furred areas, utility
tunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts and elevator shafts.
Finished Metal Surfaces: Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum,
Stainless steel, c romium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished
materials will not require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated.
Operating Parts and Labels: Moving parts of operating units,
mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators,
linkages, sinkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts will not
require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated.
Do not paint over any code -required labels, such as Underwriters'
Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification,
performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates.
SUBMITTALS:
Manufacturer's Data: Submit mfr's technical information including
paint labelana ysis and application instructions for each material
proposed for use.
Samples: Submit samples for Architect's review of color and texture
-, only. Provide a listing of the material and application for each coat
of each finish sample.
On actual wood surfaces, provide two 4" X 8" samples of each
natural and stained wood finish as required. Label and identify
each as to location and application.
On actual wall surfaces and other exterior and interior building
components, duplicate painted finishes of the prepared samples.
On at least 100 sq. ft. of surface as directed, provide full -coat
r.. finish samples until required sheen, color and texture is
obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in -
place work.
0
DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
Deliver all materials to the job site in original, new and unopened
packages and containers bearing mfr's name and label, and the following
information.
PAINTING
9TO-2
Name or title of material.
Fed. Spec. number, if applicable.
Mfr's stock number and date of mfr.
Mfr's name.
Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle.
Constituents.
Thinning instructions.
Application instructions.
Color name and number.
JOB CONDITIONS: Apply water -base paints only when the temperature of
surfaces to Be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between
50 degrees F. and 90 degrees F. unless otherwise permitted by the paint
mfr's printed instructions.
Apply solvent -thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to
be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees
F. and 95 degrees F. unless otherwise permitted by the paint mfr's
printed instructions.
Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist; or when the relative
humidity exceeds 85%; or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise
permitted by the paint mfr's printed instructions.
Painting may be continued during inclement weather only if the areas
and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within the
temperature limits specified by the paint mfr. during application and
drying periods.
PRODUCTS:
COLORS AND FINISHES: Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes,
are indicated in the "schedules" of the contract documents.
Prior to beginning work, the Architect will furnish color selections
for surfaces to be painted.
Use representative colors when preparing samples for review.
Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on the
job.
Color Pigments: Pure, non -fading, applicable types to suit the
su s rates an service indicated.
Lead content in the pigment, if any, is limited to contain not
more than 0.5% lead, as lead metal based on the total non-volatile
(dry -film) of the paint by weight.
This limitation is extended to all interior surfaces and those
exterior surfaces, such as stairs, decks, porches, railings,
windows, and doors which are readily accessible to children under
seven years of age.
PAINTING 9TO-3
Paint Coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with
prime paints used. Review other sections of these specifications in
which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total
coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other
trades, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials
proposed for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. Provide
barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as
required. Notify the Architect in writing of any anticipated problems
using specified coating systems with substrates primed by others.
MATERIAL QUALITY:
Provide best quality grade of the various types of coatings as
regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials mfr's. Materials
not displaying the mfr's identification as a standard, best -grade
product will not be acceptable.
Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not
intended to imply that products of the named mfrs. are required to
the exclusion of equivalent products of other mfrs.
Federal Specifications establish the minimum acceptable quality
for paint materials. Provide a written certification from the
paint mfr. that materials provided meet or exceed these minimums.
Mfr's products which comply with the coating qualitative
requirements of applicable Federal Specifications, yet differ in
quantitative requirements, may be considered for use only when
acceptable to the Architect. Furnish material data and mfr's
certificate of performance to the Architect for any proposed
substitutions.
Provide undercoat paint produced by the same mfr. as the finish coats.
-� Use only thinners approved by the paint mfr., and use only within
recommended limits.
EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS:
Provide following paint systems for the various substrates, as
indicated.
General Painted Wood:
EPS-7: 1st Coat - Primer undercoat (TT-P-25).
2nd Coat - Exterior oil paint (TT-P-105).
3rd Coat - Exterior oil paint (TT-P-105).
Not less than 3.5 mils dry film thickness.
Painted Wood Trim:
EPS-9: 1st Coat - Primer undercoat (TT-P-25).
2nd Coat - Alkyd trim enamel (TT-P-37).
3rd Coat - Alkyd trim enamel (TT-P-37).
PAINTING
9TO-4
Ferrous Metal:
EPS-15: 1st Coat - Red lead pigmented primer (TT-P-86, Type
III).
2nd Coat - High gloss alkyd enamel (TT-E-48, Class A).
3rd Coat - High gloss alkyd enamel (TT-E-48, Class A .
First coat not required on items delivered shop primed.
INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS:
Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as
indicated.
Gypsum Drywall Systems:
IPS-10: 1st Coat - Latex primer (TT-P-650).
2nd Coat - Interior latex emulsion (TT-P-29).
Ferrous Metal:
IPS-19: 1st Coat - Red lead primer (TT-P-86).
2nd Coat - Interior latex emulsion (TT-P-29).
3rd Coat - Inteiror latex emulsion (TT-P-29).
First coat not required on items that are shop primed.
Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness.
Painted Woodwork and Hardboard:
IPS-25: 1st
Coat
- Enamel undercoat
(TT-E-543).
2nd
Coat
- Semi -gloss enamel
(TT-E-509).
3rd
Coat
- Semi -gloss enamel
(TT-E-509).
Stained Woodwork:
IPS-27: 1st Coat - Interior oil stain (TT-S-711).
2nd Coat - Bleached shellac (TT-S-300).
3rd Coat - Rubbing varnish (TT-V-86 .
4th Coat - Rubbing Varnish (TT-V-86 .
Fill open grained wood with filler complying with RR-F-
336, and wipe before first varnish coat.
(above may be revised on job as directed by Architect to
achieve desired results.)
FYMITTON:
INSPECTION:
Applicator must examine the area and conditions under which painting
work is to be applied and notify the Contractor in writing of
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to the Applicator.
PAINTING 9TO-5
Starting of painting work will be construed as the Applicator's
acceptance of the surfaces and conditions within any particular area.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed
surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a
durable paint film.
SURFACE PREPARATIONS:
General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict
accor ance with the paint mfr's instructions and as herein specified,
for each particular substrate conditions.
'^ Remove all hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates,
lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finish -
painted, or provide surface -applies protection prior to surface
preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for the
complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following
completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall the removed
items by workmen skilled in the trades involved.
Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface
treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning.
^`- Program the cleaning and painting so that contaminants from the
cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly -painted surfaces.
Wood: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of all dirt, oil, or other
o eign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as
required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view,
and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a
"~ thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer, before
application of the priming coat. After priming, fill holes and
imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood -filler.
•^ Sandpaper smooth when dried.
Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job -painted immediately upon
delivery to job. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides
of such wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, paneling, etc.
When transparent finish is required, use spar varnish for backpriming.
Sackprime paneling on interior partitions only where masonry, plaster,
or other wet wall construction occurs on backsides.
Seal tops, bottoms, and cut-outs of unprimed wood doors with a heavy
coat of varnish or equivalent sealer immediately upon delivery to job.
Ferrous metals: Clean ferrous surfaces, which are not galvanized
or shop -coated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other
foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants
with an acceptable n-petroleum based solvent.
PAINTING 9TO-6
MATERIALS PREPARATION:
Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with mfr's directions.
Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers.
Maintain containers used in storage, mixing and application of paint in
a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform
density, and stir as required during the application of the materials.
Do not stir surface film into the material. Remove the film and if
necessary, strain the material before using.
APPLICATION:
General: Apply paint in accordance with the mfr's directions. Use
applicators and techniques best suited for the substrate and type of
material being applied.
Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show
through the final coat of paint, until the paint film is of uniform
finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to insure that
all surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed
fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat
surfaces.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as
similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently -fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation
of equipment.
Paint the back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers
to match the exposed surfaces.
Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges the same as the
exterior faces, unless otherwise indicated.
Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
Omit the first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop -
primed and touch-up painted, unless otherwise indicated.
Scheduling Painting: Apply the first -coat material to surfaces that
have been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting as
soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper
drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm,
does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and the
application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of
adhesion of the undercoat.
PAINTING 9TO-7
Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material at not less than the
m r s recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film
thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by coating
mfr.
CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION:
Clean-up: During the progress of the work, remove from the site of all
1scar a paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at the end of each
work day.
Upon completion of painting work clean window glass and other paint -
spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of
" washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage
finished surfaces.
Protection: protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or
not aga st damage by painting and finishing work. Correct any damage
by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to
the Architect.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly -painted
finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for
protection of their work, after completion of painting operations.
At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all
damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
END OF SECTION
PAINTING 9TO-8
SECTION 9Y5
WALL COVERINGS
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of wall coverings required is indicated on drawings and in
schedules.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Fire Hazard Classification: Provide materials bearing UL label and
marking, indicating fire hazard classification of wall covering, as
determined by ASTM E 84.
Provide materials complying with the following fire hazard
classifications:
Flame spread not more than 25.
Fuel contributed not more than 15.
Smoke developed not more than 25.
CIIRMTTTALS:
Product Data: Submit mfr's technical data and installation
ins ructions or each type of wall covering and installation materials.
Samples: Submit samples of each type of wall covering, illustrating
range OT color and pattern variation.
Certification: Submit mfr's certification that all materials furnished
or e wor comply in all respects with requirements specified.
Maintenance Instructions: Submit mfr's printed instructions for
maintenance of instal e work, including precautions for use of
cleaning materials which could damage wall covering.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
Deliver materials to project site in original packages or containers
clearly labeled to identify mfr., brand name, quality or grade, and
fire hazard classification.
VINYL WALL COVERING 9Y5-1
Store materials in original undamaged packages or containers. Do not
store wall covering fabric in an upright position. Maintain
temperature in storage area above 40 degrees F (4 C).
JOB CONDITIONS:
Maintain constant minimum temperature of 60 F (16 C) at areas of
installation for at least 72 hours before and 48 hours after
application of materials.
Illuminate areas of installation using building's permanent lighting
system; temporary lighting alone will not be acceptable.
PRODUCTS:
MA Trnr Al C.
General: Comply with FS CCC-W-408 for types required, and as herein
speciTi ed.
Medium Duty: Type II; total weight not less than 13 oz. per sq. yd.
with minimum vinyl coating (less fabric) 7 oz. per sq. yd.
Color and Pattern or Texture: As selected by the Architect.
ACCESSORY ITEMS:
.- Adhesives: Provide mfr's recommended adhesive, primer, and sealer,
produced expressly for use with selected wall covering on substrate as
shown on drawings. Provide materials which are mildew -resistant and
non -staining to wall covering.
Release Coat: Oil base sealer or enamel undercoater for drywall
substrates.
EXECUTION
T KICnr'PYT 11 1 .
Installer must examine areas and conditions under which wall coverng is
to be installed and must notify Contractor in writing of conditions
detrimental to proper and teimly completion of work. Do not proceed
with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
acceptable to Installer.
PREPARATION: Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing from
packaging in area of installation not less than 24 hours before
application.
Remove switchplates, wall plates, and surface -mounted fixtures in areas
where wall covering is to be applied.
VINYL WALL COVERING 9Y5-2
Prime and seal substrates in accordance with wall covering mfr's
recommendations for type of substrate. Apply surface sealer to gypsum
drywall which will permit subsequent removal of wall covering without
damage to paper facing.
Drywall preparation is included in Division 9 drywall section.
INSTALLATION:
Wall Covering: Place wall covering panels consecutively in order cut
from rolls, including filling of spaces above or below openings. Hang
by reversing alternate strips except on match patterns.
Apply adhesive to back of wall covering and place in accordance with
mfr's instructions. Install seams plumb, and at least 6" away from
corners. Horizontal seams are not permitted. Overlap seams and
double -cut to assure tight closure. Toll, brush, or use broad knife to
remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. Cut wall
covering evenly to edges of outlet boxes or support.
Trim selvages as required to assure color uniformity and pattern match.
Remove excess adhesive along finished seams while it is still wet using
warm water and clean sponge, and wipe dry.
Install wall covering with intimate substrate bond, cmooth, clean, and
without wrinkles, gaps, and overlaps.
Replace removed plates and fixtures; verify cut edges of wall covering
are completely concealed.
CLEANING:
Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from wall
covering installation upon completion of work, and leave areas of
installation in neat, clean condition.
END OF SECTION
VINYL WALL COVERING 9Y5-3
r
SECTION IOBl
TOILET ACCESSORIES
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions,
Supplementary General conditions, Special Conditions and General
Requirements (Division 1) apply to the work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Provide the follwoing toilet accessories at the new Men's toilet as
shown on the drawings.
The type of toilet accessories required include the following:
Paper towel dispensers
-- Toilet tissue dispensers
Waste receptacles
Soap dispensers
Grab bars
Shower curtain rods
Frameless mirror.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which
.- must be set 7n concrete or built into masonry for the installation
accessories. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
See concrete sections of these specifications for installation of
inserts and anchorage devices.
Products: Provide products of the same mfr. for each type of accessory
unit and for units exposed in the same areas, unless otherwise
acceptable to the Architect.
Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of units will not be
permitted, except where otherwise indicated.
Provide locks, with the same keying for each type of accessory units in
the project wherever possible. Furnish two keys for each lock.
SUBMITTALS:
Mfr's Data: For information only, submit 2 copies of mfr's technical
data and tallation instructions for each toilet accessory. Transmit
copies of installation instructions to the Installer.
Samples: When requested, submit full-size samples of units to
rc i ec for review of design and operation. Acceptable samples will
be returned and may be used in the work. Compliance with all other
requirements is the exclusive responsiblity of the Contractor.
TOILET ACCESSORIES 1OB1-1
Setting Drawings: Provide setting drawings, templates, instruction and
directions for installation of anchorage devices in other work.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
Stainless Steel: AISI, Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish,
unless of erwise indicated.
Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on metal, ASTM
Type SC 2.
Mirror Glass: FS DD-G-451, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, 1/ 4" thick,
with siver coating, copper protective coating, and non-metallic paint
coating.
Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 386, hot -dip galvanized
a ter fabrication.
PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS:
Recessed Paper Towel Dispenser: Size to dispense not less than 400 C-
told towels or 700 mu tio d paper towels, with interchangeable paper
drop. Fabricate dispensers to be recessed in a nominal 4" wall depth,
with cabinet and door not less than 0.031" thick (22 ga) stainless
steel, all welded construction without mitered corners. Hang doors
with a concealed, full-length stainless steel piano hinge, and installa
tumbler-lockset.
WASTE RECEPTACLES:
General: Fabricate waste receptacle units of not less than 0.031"
sic 22 ga.) stainless steel, with all joints continuous welded.
Provide unit sizes shown on the drawings.
Open Recessed Waste Receptacles: Fabricate units with flange of one-
piece seamless construction without mitered ocrners. Fabricate
receptacle with seamless exposed walls, continuous welded bottom pan,
and hemmed edges. Furnish heavy duty vinyl removable liner, secured
to receptacle at not less than 4 points with grommet holes hung from
stainless steel hooks.
TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS:
General: Provide toilet tissue dispensers at each new water closet.
Multi -Roll Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Fabricate units of not less than
thick ga.' stainless stee , to store and dispense not less
than two 4 1/ 2" by 4 1/ 2" core tissue rolls. Fabricate flange from a
single piece, with seamless construction. Hinge front of unit at
bottom with a continuous piano hinge and secured with a tumbler lock
TOILET ACCESSORIES 1OBl-2
0-1
-, keyed to other accessories. Include visible indication when refill is
needed. Reserve roll to be placed in service by automatic release or
by pushing a release bar.
Fabricate recessed units to suit a 4" deep wall opening unless
otherwise indicated.
Furnish chromium -plated brass recessed units fabricated of heavy
duty one-piece construction, complete with standard mounting
plates to suit wall construction.
Grab Bars: Furnish grab bars where indicated and as herein specified.
Stainless Steel Grab Bars: Provide stainless steel grab bars as
follows:
Mounting: Exposed, with mfr's standard flanges and anchorages for
yp�installation.
Non -Slip Gripping Surfaces: Peened, knurled or straited, mfr's
standard.
Size: 1 1/ 2" o.d., with wall thickness not less than 0.049" (18
ga . .
SHOWER CURTAIN RODS: Furnish shower curtain rods where indicated, and
as follows:
Material: Stainless steel.
Size: 1" o.d. with wall thickness not less than 0.035".
Flanges: To match curtain rods, unless otherwise indicated.
SOAP DISPENSERS:
Liquid Soap Dispensers: Fabricate units to dispense liquid soap or
lather in measured quantity by pump action with stainless steel
pistons, springs, and internal parts.
Provide liquid soap dispensers as follows:
Type: Utility, liquid or lather units.
Capacity: 12 fl. oz., unless otherwise indicated.
Cover: Polished chromium finish with translucent inner container.
Mounting: Recess mount in countertop so that soap will fall into
lavatory.
EXECUTION
0
TOILET ACCESSORIES 1OBl-3
T MQDPrTT ()N
Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which toilet
accessories are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
INSTALLATION:
Use concealed fastenings wherever possible.
Provide anchors, bolts and other necessary anchorages, and attach
accessories securely to walls and partitions in locations as shown or
directed.
Install concealed mounting devices and fasteners fabricated of the same
material as the accessories, or of galvanized steel, as recommended by
mfr.
Install exposed mounting devices and fasteners finished to match the
accessories.
Provide theft -resistant fasteners for all accessory mountings.
Secure toilet room accessories in accordance with the mfr's
instructions for each item and each type of substrate construction.
END OF SECTION
TOILET ACCESSORIES 1OBl-4
r-
'" SECTION 12B1
HORIZONTAL VENETIAN BLINDS
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any), apply to
the work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
p- The extent of horizontal blind units are shown on the drawings and in
schedules.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Provide each blind as a complete unit produced by one mfr., including
hardware, accessory items, mounting brackets, and fastenings.
Colors: Provide materials in colors as selected by the Architect from
mar s standard colors.
CIIRMTTTA1 S
Product Data:. Submit mfr's specifications and installation
instructions for each type of blind unit required. Include methods of
installation for each type of opening and supporting structure.
Transmit copy of instructions and recommendations to the Installer.
PRODUCTS:
MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS:
Headrail: Mfr's standard headrail, channel -shaped section fabricated
row` m m n. 0.020" thick sheet steel. Increase metal thickness as
recommended by the mfr. for large blind units. Cross -brace for extra
rigidity.
Furnish complete with tilting mechanism, top and end brace, top cradle,
cord lock, and accessory items required for the type of blind and
installation indicated.
Bottom Rail: Mfr's standard tubular steel bottom rail, designed to
withstand twisting or sagging. Contour top surface to match slat
curvature, with flat or slightly curved bottom. Close ends with mfr's
standard metal or plastic end caps, of the same color as rail. Finish
rail the same color as slats, unless otherwise indicated.
Slats: Mfr's standard, spring -tempered slats (louver blades), with
roun ed corners and forming burrs removed, as follows:
HORIZONTAL VENETIAN BLINDS 12B1-1
Aluminum slats not less than 0.010" thick.
Provide 1" narrow slats with other components sized to suit.
Braided Ladders: Mfr's standard polyester support cords with
integrall-y-Fr-a-d-e-cT ladder rungs. Provide cord size and rung spacing as
required for each type of blind shown.
Tilter: Furnish wand (or rod) type tilter consisting of standard
tilter mechanism adopted for rotating wand operation. Furnish mfr's
standard plastic or aluminum rod of proper length to suit blind
installation.
Furnish mfr's standard tilt rod to suit blind type and size.
Cords: Mfr's standard braided polyester or nylon cord, sized to suit
in type, equipped with soft -molded plastic, rubber or composition
tassels securely attached to each cord end.
Cord Locks: Mfr's standard cord locks as required for each type of
blind.
Cord Equalizers: Nylon, self -aligning type, designed to maintain
horizontaT_l5T-1n`U position.
Hardware: Furnish mfr's standard brackets, supports and internal
rein orcement as required to suit blind type and size. Finish exposed
hardware and accessories to match rail color.
Finish: Prime alum. slats with chromate coversion coating, followed by
m�r`s standard glass -smooth, baked -on synthetic resin enamel finish.
FABRICATION AND OPERATION:
Prior to fabrication, verify actual opening dimensions by accurate site
measurements. Adjust blind dimensions for proper fit in all openings.
Fabricate components of blinds from non -corrosive, non -staining, non -
fading materials which are completely compatible with each other, and
which do not require lubrication during normal expected life.
Fabricate blind units to completely fill the openings as indicated,
from head to sill and jamb to jamb.
For continuous window wall installations, fabricated blinds so that
ends occur only over mullions or other defined vertical separations,
unless otherwise indicated.
Space supporting tapes or cords in accordance with mfr's standards,
unless otherwise indicated.
Space louver blades (slats) to provide overlap for light exclusion when
in the fully closed position.
HORIZONTAL VENETIAN BLINDS 12B1-2
Equip blind units, unless otherwise indicated, for the following
operation:
Full -tilting operation with slats rotating approx. 180 degrees.
Place tilt operating controls on left-hand side of blind units.
Full -height raising, to mfr's min. stacking dimension, with
lifting cord locks for stopping blinds at any point of ascending
or descending travel. Place pull cords on right-hand side of
blind units.
EXECUTION
INSPECTION: Installer must examine the substrates and conditions under
which the rizontal venetian blinds are to be installed and notify the
Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to
the Installer.
-� INSTALLATION: Install horizontal venetian blinds as shown on the
Trawings and in accordance with the mfr's instructions. Provide
intermediate supports at intervals to permit easy entrance and removal
of head, and to ensure level head and slat position.
Provide adequate clearance between sash and Divisions between blinds to
permit unencumbered operation of sash hardware.
Divisions between blinds are permitted only at mullions of continuous
windows or openings where more than one blind for one opening occurs.
END OF SECTION
HORIZONTAL VENETIAN BLINDS 12B1-3
SECTION 15AO
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAC—GEREVE
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 of the
Specifications apply to the work specified in this Division as well as
Division 16.
All work covered by this section of the Specifications shall be
accomplished in accordance with all applicable provisions of the
Contract Documents and any addenda or directive which may be issued.
GENERAL:
The Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment, materials, etc. and
shall perform all operations in connection with the installation of
Mechanical and Electrical work in accordance with these Contract
Documents.
The Contractor shall execute all work specified or indicated on
accompanying Drawings. Contractor shall provide all equipment
necessary and usually furnished in connection with such work and
systems, whether or not mentioned specifically mentioned.
Every contractor shall be responsible for all his work fitting into
place in a satisfactory and neat workmanlike manner in every particular
to the approval of the Owner.
Confer with the General Contractor and other contractors regarding the
location and size of fixtures, conduit, ducts, openings, switches,
outlets, etc., in order that there be no interferences between the
installation or progress of the work of any Contractor on the project.
The Mechanical and Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic and shall be
followed as closely as actual construction of the building and the work
of other trades will allow. All changes from Drawings necessary to
make the work of each Contractor conform to the building construction
and the work of other trades shall be done at the appropriate
Contractor's expense.
All equipment shall be installed complete with all necessary fittings,
supports, accessories, etc., as necessary for a complete installation,
providing the desired function. All equipment shall be installed in
accordance with mfr's recommended procedure unless specifically stated
otherwise.
Nothing in these specifications or drawings shall be construed as
directing any contractor from deviating from any legally binding code
or ordinance.
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL, GENERAL 15AO-1
n
OPENINGS AND SLEEVES IN CONSTRUCTION:
Most openings required in wall, floor, roof, ceiling, etc. construction
-� for Mechanical and Electrical Work will be provided by the General
Contractor in accordance with information furnished by the Mechanical
and Electrical Contractors. All sleeves, inserts, forms, etc.,
required for openings shall be furnished by the Contractor requiring
the same. The Mechanical and Electrical Contractors shall be
responsible for their size, fabrication, and location. Installation
will be by General Contractor. Where new work has been installed
previous to such request, the General Contractor will do the necessary
cutting and patching at the expense of the Mechanical and Electrical
Contractor.
PROTECTING SITE:
Provide adequate barricades, construction signs, torches, red lanterns,
guards, etc., as required during the progress of the work. Observe
all applicable regulations respecting safety provision, barricades,
etc.
Protect utilities, trees, shrubbery, fences, poles, sidewalks, curbs
and all other property and surface structures from damage. Any items
which are disturbed shall be restored by the Contractor at his own
expense.
Whenever work damages streets, lawns, sidewalks, parking areas, curbs
or other finished surfaces, replace such surfaces with material to
match existing surfaces as approved by proper authorities, including
reinforcing steel where required.
Whenever work damages existing grassed areas, Contractor shall install
sod to match existing.
MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL COORDINATION:
Unless otherwise indicated, the Electrical Contractor will furnish and
install all conduit, wiring, disconnects, starters, thermal overload
heaters, holding coils, remote pushbutton stations, Hand -off -auto and
multi -speed switches, and pilot lights for all electrically operated
mechanical equipment, including final connections leaving items ready
for operation.
Where starters are an integral part of the equipment, The Electrical
Contractor shall furnish and install all wiring and make all final
connections to the line side of the starter or disconnect device. All
wiring beyond this point shall be by the Mechanical Contractor
furnishing the motor.
The Mechanical Contractor shall provide all control devices such as
thermostats, pressure sensors, humidistats, etc. associated with the
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL, GENERAL 15AO-2
mechanical equipment, and shall install those items which, due to their
method of operation, must be connected or integrated into the
equipment. Items not attached to mechanical equipment, duct or piping
shall be installed by the Electrical Contractor. All wiring for
mechanical control shall be provided and installed by the electrical
Contractor, regardless of who installed the device. Control diagrams
shall be provided by the Mechanical Contractor.
Each contractor shall consult with the Electrical Contractor before
ordering or installing equipment, to coordinate the motor, starter,
holding coil, overload, interlocks, etc. and shall be equally
responsible to insure that the equipment installed is of proper size
and type.
After wiring is completed by the Electrical Contractor, each Mechanical
Contractor shall inspect the appropriate wiring before motors are
operated. If any discrepancies are discovered the Mechanical
Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing. The Owner shall arrange
to have the changes made as required. After any required changes are
complete, the Mechanical Contractor who furnished the motor shall
assume complete responsibility for motor protection during the warranty
period including initial start-up of each motor.
CONCRETE WORK AND PADS:
All concrete, reinforcing, and form work necessary in connection with
the construction of pads and the concrete around ducts or raceways
shall be provided by the Mechanical or Electrical Contractor, as
appropriate.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT: The following requirements must be fully completed
before the final pplication for payment will be accepted or approved.
Final inspection performed and all correction made.
Submittal of: Maintenance manual
Equipment warranties
Owner instruction certification letter
Receipt for all loose items.
END OF SECTION
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL, GENERAL 15AO-3
SECTION 15B0
MECHANICAL 1DEN11FIGA11UN
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Type of identification devices specified in this section include the
following: Underground -type plastic line marker.
SIJBMT TTALS _
Product Data: Submit product specifications and installation
�- instructions or each identification material and device required.
PRODUCTS
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS:
General: Provide mfr's standard products of categories and types
required for each application as referenced in other Division-15
Sections. Where more than single type is specified for application,
selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each
product category.
Underground -Type Plastic Line Marker: Mfr's standard permanent,
bright -colored, continuous -printed plan -tic tape, intended for direct -
burial service; not less than 6" wide x 4 mils thick. Provide tape
with printing which,, most accurately indicates type of service of buries
Pipe.
LETTERING AND GRAPHICS:
General: Coordinate nacres, abbreviations and other designations used
'n mecTanical identification work, with corresponding designations
shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording
as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by mfrs. or
as required for groper identification and operation/maintenance of
mechanical systems and equipsent.
-- EXECUTION
APPLICATION MD INSTALLATION:
Underground Piping Identification: During back-filling/top-soiling of
each exterior underground piping systems, install continuous
underground -type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line
at 6" - 8°" below finished grade. Where multiple small lines are buried
in common trench and do not exceed overall width of 16", install single
line marker. For tile fields and similar installations, mark only edge
pipe lines of field.
END OF SECTION
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15BO-1
SECTION 15C0
PIPE, TUBE
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Components specified in this section include the following:
Piping Materials
Pipe/Tube Fittings
Miscellaneous Piping
Piping Specialties.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Materials/ Products
NSF Labels: Where plastic piping is indicated to transport potable
water, provide pipe and fittings bearing approval label by National
Sanitation Foundation (NSF).
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit catalog cuts, specifications, installation
ins ruc ions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of pipe, tube and
fitting.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
Except for hub -and -spigot and similar units of pipe, provide factory -
applied plastic end -caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain
end -caps through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent
pipe -end damage and eliminate dirt and moisture from inside of pipe and
tube.
Where possible, store pipe and tube inside and protected from weather.
Where necessary to store outside, elevate above grade and enclose With
durable, waterproof wrapping.
Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage
and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping.
PRODUCTS
PIPING MATERIALS:
General: Provide pipe material indicated for each service. Where
ypl=' e, grade or class is not indicated, provide proper selection as
determined by Installer for installation requirements and comply with
governing regulations and industry standards. Piping components shall
be as follows:
PIPE, TUBE AND FITTINGS 15CO-1
n
Copper Tube: ANSI/ASTM B 88, Type (wall thickness) as indicated
or eachservice, hard -drawn temper, except as otherwise
indicated.
Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC): ANSI/ASTM D 1785.
Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe (PVC):
SI ASTM D 2665.
PIPE/TUBE FITTINGS:
General: Provide factory -fabricated fittings of type indicated for
each service and pipe size. Provide sizes and types matching pipe
connection in each case. Where not otherwise indicated, comply with
governing regulations and industry standards for selections, and with
pipe mfr's recommendations where applicable. Fittings shall be as
follows:
Copper Tube:
Wrought -Copper Solder -Joint Fittings: ANSI B 16.22.
Copper -Tube Unions: Provide standard products recommended by mfr.
or use in service indicated.
Plastic Pipe:
PVC/CPVC Pipe Fittings: ANSI/ASTM D 2464 for Schedule 80 threaded
i i ngs ; D 2466 for Schedule 40 socket -type;
ANSI/ASTM 2467 for Schedule 80 socket type; ANSI/ASTM D 2564 for
solvent cement; ANSI/ASTM D 2665 for drain, waste, and vent.
P..
Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 2609 for insert fittings; ANSI/ASTM D 3261
or Schedule 40 and 80. PVC Sewer Pipe Fittings: Match PVC sewer
pipe; comply with same standard (ANSI/ASTM D 2729); ANSI/ASTM D
2564 for solvent cement.
MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS/PRODUCTS:
Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering
ma eria s as determined by Installer to comply with installation
requirements.
Tim -Antimony Solder: ANSI/ASTM B 32, Grade 95TA.
Silver Solder: ANSI/ASTM B 32, Grade 96.5TS.
Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B 16.21; full-faced for cast-iron
flanges; raised -face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated.
PIPE, TUBE AND FITTINGS 15CO-2
Piping Connectors for Dissimilar Non -Pressure Pipe: Elastomeric
annular ring insert, or elastomeric flexible coupling secured at each
end with stainless steel clamps, sized for exact fit to pipe ends and
subject to approval by plumbing code.
PIPING SPECIALTIES:
Pipe Escutcheons: Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with
inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside diameter, or outside of
pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of
escutcheon to completely cover pipe sleeve extension, if any. Furnish
pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas, prime
paint finish for unoccupied areas.
EXECUTION
PIPE INSTALLATION:
Install pipe, tube and fittings in accordance with recognized industry
practices which will achieve permanently -leakproof piping systems,
capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure.
Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate
and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of
valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of
reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16"
misalignment tolerance.
Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and
horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever
possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines.
Locate runs as shown or described be diagrams, details and notations
or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does
not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and
its equipment.
Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other
structural and permanent -enclosure elements of building; limit
clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment
of piping, but allow for insulation thickness, if any.
Where possible, locate insulated piping in finished and occupied
spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in
hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase
horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated.
Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer
vaults and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and
enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that must
be run through electrical spaces.
PIPING SYSTEM JOINTS:
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS 15CO-3
Provide joints of type indicated in each piping system.
Soldered Pipe: Solder copper tube -and -fitting joints where indicated,
in accordance' with recognized industry practice. Cut tube ends
-^, squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of areas of
both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and
solder in manner which will draw solder full depth and circumference of
joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens.
Plastic Pipe/Tube Joints: Comply with mfr's instructions and
recommendations, and with applicable industry standards:
Heat Joints: ANSI/ASTM D 2657.
Solvent -Cemented Joints: ANSI/ASTM D 2235, and ANSI/ASTM F 402.
INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES:
Pipe Escutcheons: Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration
through floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is
exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to
pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush
with adjoining surface.
Sleeves: Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes
t roug walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs. Do not install sleeves
through structural members of work, except as detailed on drawings, or
as reviewed by Architect/Engineer.
Install sleeves accurately centered on pipe runs. Size sleeves so that
piping and insulation (if any) will have free movement in sleeve,
including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe
sizes larger than piping run. Where insulation includes vapor -barrier
jacket, provide sleeve with sufficient clearance for installation.
Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated,
and finish flush to surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor
sleeves 1/4" above level floor finish, and 3/4" above floor finish
sloped to drain.
Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and
�. other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent
concrete and other materials from entering sleeves.
Install sheet -metal sleeves at interior partitions and ceilings other
than suspended ceilings.
Install plastic -pipe sleeves except as otherwise indicated.
Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the following:
PIPE, TUBE AND FITTINGS 15CO-4
Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Loosely assemble rubber links around
pipe with bolts an pressure plates located under each bolt head
and nut. Push into sleeve and center. Tighten bolts until links
have expanded to form watertight seal.
CLEANING, FLUSHING AND INSPECTING:
General: Flush out piping systems
witH -required test. Inspect each run
joints, supports and accessory items.
PIPING TESTS:
with clean water before proceeding
of each system for completion of
All Piping Tests: Provide temporary equipment for testing, including
pump and gages.
Test piping system before insulation is installed wherever feasible,
and remove control devices fore testing. Test all below -grade piping
before backfill, NO EXCEPTIONS.
Test each natural section for leakage at end of test period. Test
fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test
pressure, unless noted otherwise below.
Domestic Water Piping Test: Fill each section with water and
pressurize for indicated pressure and time. Required test period is 2
hours. Test each piping system at 150% of operating pressure
indicated, but not less than 25 psi test pressure.
Sanitary Waste/Vent Piping Test: Required test period is two hours.
lest the waste and vent piping system with a 15' head of water
pressure. This shall be accomplished by sealing all pipe openings and
installing a temporary section of piping which shall extend 15' above
the lowest portion of the piping system.
Miscellaneous Drainage Piping Leakage Test: Seal pipe opening and fill
pipe with water. Required test period is 2 hours. Test fails if
leakage is observed.
Repairs: Repair or replace piping by disassembly and
reinstallation, using new materials to the extent required to
eliminate leaks, and re -test as specified to demonstrate
compliance. Do not use chemicals, stop -leak compounds, mastics,
or other temporary repair methods.
STERILIZE DOMESTIC WATER PIPING:
After material testing is complete, drain test water from piping and
flush out piping to remove dirt and other contaminants. Perform
required disinfection and disinfection -testing.
Disinfection: Disinfection shall be done using chlorine, gas or
iqui a cium or sodium hypochloride may be used.
PIPE, TUBE AND FITTINGS 15CO-5
A service cock with check valve shall be provided and located at the
water service entrance, downstream of the isolation valve (i.s.
downstream of the distribution header). The disinfecting agent shall
be injected into and through the system from this cock only.
The disinfecting agent shall be injected by a proportioning device
through the service cock slowly and continuously at an even rate.
During disinfection, flow of disinfecting agent into main connected to
public water supply is not permitted.
All sections valves shall be opened during disinfection. All outlets
shall be fully opened at least twice during injection and the residual
checked with orthotolidin solution.
When the chlorine residual concentration, calculated on the volume of
water the piping will contain, indicated not less than 50 ppm (parts
per million) at all outlets, then all valves shall be closed and
secured.
The residual chlorine shall be retained in the piping system for a
period of not less than 24 hours.
After the retention, the residual shall be not less than 5 ppm. If
less, then the process shall be repeated as described above.
If satisfactory, then all fixtures shall be flushed with clean potable
water until residual chlorine by ortholin tests shall be greater than
the incoming water supply.
All work and certification of performance shall be performed by
approved applicators or qualified personnel.
END OF SECTION
PIPE, TUBE AND FITTINGS 15CO-6
SECTION 15DO
VALVES
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Types of valves specified in this section include
the following:
Gate valves; Ball valves; Swing check.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Marking of Valves: Comply with MSS SP-25.
Valve Dimensions: For face-to-face and end -to -end dimensions of
ange or we ing-end valve bodies, comply with ANSI B 16.10.
Valve Type: Provide valves of same type by same mfr.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit catalog cuts, specifications and installation
instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of valve. Include
pressure drop curve or chart for each type and size of valve. Submit
valve schedule showing mfr's figure number, size, location, and valve
features for each required valve.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for
each type o va ve. Include this data in Maintenance Manual.
PRODUCTS
VALVES:
General: Provide factory -fabricated valves recommended by mfr. for use
in service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings
indicated; provide proper selection as determined by Installer to
comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated, and
connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment
connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is
Installer's option.
Gate Valves: Select valves designed for re -packing under pressure when
fully opened, equipped with packing suitable for intended service.
Select valves designed so back seating protects packing and stem
threads from fluid when valve is fully opened, and equipped with gland
follower.
Comply with the following standards:
Cast -Iron Valves: MSS S P-70.
Bronze Valves: MSS SP-80.
Steel a ves: ANSI B 16.34.
VALVES
15DO-1
Domestic Water Service:
E Flanged Ends 2 1/ 2" and Larger: Class 125, iron body bronze
mounted, o ebonnet, rising stem, OS & Y solid wedge.
Soldered Ends 2" and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body,
screwed bonnet, non -rising stem, solid wedge.
Bald Valves: Select with port area equal to or greater than connecting
pipe area, include seat ring designed to hold sealing material.
Comply with the following standards:
Cast -Iron Valves: MSS SP-72.
Steel a ves: ANSI B 16.34.
Domestic Water Service:
" Soldered Ends 2" and Smaller: Class 125, bronze 2 piece
body, bronze ball, bronze stem.
Swing Check Valves: Construct pressure containing parts of valves as
0 ows :
Bronze Valves: 125 or 150 psi: ANSI/ASTM B 62.
Metallic Bated Bronze Valves: 200 or 300 psi: ANSI/ASTM B 61.
Iron Body Valves: 126, Grade
Comply with MSS SP-71 for design, workmanship, material and testing.
Construct valves of pressure castings free of any impregnating
-. materials.
Construct valves of bronze, re -grinding, with seating angle 40 deg. to
45 deg. unless composition disc is specified.
Provide stop plug as renewable stop for disc hanger, unless otherwise
indicated. Construct disc and hanger as separate parts, with disc free
to rotate..
Support hanger pins on both ends by removable side plugs.
Domestic Water Service:
Flanged Ends 2 1/ 2" and Larger: Class 125, iron body bronze
mounted, bolted cap, orizontal swing, cast-iron disc.
Soldered Ends 2" and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body,
screwed cap, horizontal swing, bronze disc.
VALVE FEATURES:
VALVES 15DO-2
General: Provide valves with features indicated and, where not
ot-Few se indicated, provide proper valve features as determined by
Installer for installation requirements. Comply with ANSI B 31.1.
Flanged: Valve flanges complying with ANSI B 16.1 (cast iron), ANSI B
16.5 steel), or ANSI B 16.24 (bronze).
Threaded: Valve ends complying with ANSI B 2.1.
Solder -Joint: Valve ends complying with ANSI B 16.18.
Trim: Fabricate pressure -containing components of valve, including
stems (shafts) and seats from brass or bronze materials, of standard
alloy recognized in valve mfr. industry.
Non -metal 1 i c Disc: Non -metal 1 i c materi al selected for servi ce
indicated in accordance with mfr's published literature.
Renewable SEat: Design seat of valve with removable disc, and assemble
valve so isc can be replaced when worn.
Extended Stem: Increase stem length by 2" min. to accommodate
insulation applied over valve.
Bonnet: Part of gate or glove valve through which stem passes to valve
ofi cfy, and attached to valve body by screws, bolts, union or welding.
Double Disc: Two-piece tapered disc in gate valve, designed for
contact on one side of each disc.
Outside Screw and Yoke (OS & Y): Stem and handwheel designed to rise
out of bonnet or yoke as valve is operated from closed to open
position.
Inside Screw, Non -rising Stem: Stem and handwheel design to rotate
without rising when valve is operated from closed to open position.
Tight Shut-off: Butterfly valve designed for flow regulation, and mfr.
o De fight in closed position.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION:
General: Except as otherwise noted, comply with the following
requirements:
Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and
equipment including valves in branch lines where necessary to
isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible
and so that separate support can be provided when necessary.
VALVES 15DO-3
Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where
possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward for
horizontal plane unless unavoidable. Install valve drains with
hose -end adapter for each valve that must be installed with stem
.— below horizontal plane.
Insulation: Where insulation is indicated, install extended -stem
valves, arranged in proper manner to receive insulation.
Applications Subject to Shock: Install valves with bodies of metal
of er than cast iron where thermal or mechanical shock is indicated or
can be expected to occur.
Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise
�. indicated, select and install valves with the following ends or types
of pipe/tube connections:
Tube Size 2" and Smaller: Soldered -joint valves.
Pipe Size 2 1/ 2" and Larger: Flanged joints.
Valve System: Select and install valves with outside screw and yoke
s ems, except provide inside screw non -rising stem valves where
headroom prevents full opening of OS & Y valves.
Non -Metallic Discs: Limit selection and installation of valves with
non-metallic iscs to locations indicated and here foreign material in
piping system can be expected to prevent tight shut-off of metal seated
^' valves.
Renewable Seats: Select and install valves with renewable seats,
except where of erwise indicated.
Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin
horizontally perpendicular to center line of pipe. Install for proper
direction of flow.
END OF SECTION
VALVES 15DO-4
R
SECTION 15GO
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING S S
GENERAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: See 15CO-Series section of these specifications
or general piping requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of local
Plumbing code pertaining to plumbing materials, construction and
installation of products.
PRODUCTS
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS:
Above Grade Piping: Provide type L, hard -drawn temper copper pipe with
wrought -copper, so der -joints fittings.
Below Slab Piping (within building): Provide type K, soft drawn copper
tube. Install with non fittings below floor; use continuous roll
tubing.
Below Grade Piping (outside building): Provide un-plasticized
polyvinyl chloride PVC schedule 40 plastic water pipe with solvent
weld joint fittings.
SPECIAL PIPING SPECIALTIES:
Water Hammer Arresters: Provide bellows type water hammer arresters,
stainless steel casing and bellows, pressure rated for 250 psi, tested
and certified in accordance with PDI Standard W H-201.
BASIC VALVES:
Provide the following valves:
Sectional Valves:
2" and Smaller: Ball valves.
and arger: Gate valves.
Shut-off Valves:
2" and Smaller: Ball valves.
an arger: Gate valves.
Check Valves:
All Sizes: Swing check valves.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS 15GO-1
SPECIAL VALVES:
General: Special valves required for domestic water piping systems
include the following types:
Balance Cocks: Soldered ends 2" and smaller: Class 125, bronze
body, bronze plug, screw driver operated, straight or angle
pattern.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR WATER PIPING:
General: Install exterior water service piping system in compliance
�.. with oca1 governing regulations.
P-
Water Service Piping: Extend water service piping of size and in
location indicated to water service entrance at building. Provide
sleeve in foundation wall for water service entry; make entry
watertight. Provide gate valve at water service entry inside building,
strainer, pressure gage, test tee with valve.
Copper Tube: Install in accordance with recommended procedures of the
Copper Ueve opment Association.
Sterilization: At completion of water service line installation, flush
and sterilize in conformance with AWW A C-601, to satisfaction of local
authorities having jurisdiction.
INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES:
Water Hammer Arresters: Install in upright position, in locations and
-of sizes in accor ance with PDI Standard WH-201, and elsewhere as
indicated.
INSTALLATION OF VALVES:
Sectional Valves: Install on each branch and riser, close to main,
where brancF or riser serves 2 or more plumbing fixtures or equipment
connections, and elsewhere as indicated.
Shut-off Valves: Install on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, and
on inlet of each plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated.
Check Valves: Install on discharge side of each pump, and elsewhere as
indicated.
Balance Cocks: Install in each hot water re -circulation loop, and
elsewhere as indicated.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS 15GO-2
Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping runouts
o fixtures of sizes indicated, but in no case smaller than required by
local plumbing code.
Mechanical Equipment Connections: Connect hot and cold water piping
system to mechanical equipment as indicated, and comply with equipment
mfr's installation instructions. Provide shut-off valve and union for
each connection, provide drain valve on drain connection.
END OF SECTION
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS 15GO-3
SECTION 15H0
SOI—C AND WASTE I
GENERAL
See section 15CO of these specifications for general pipe requirements.
APPLICATIONS:
Above ground soil, waste and vent piping within buildings including
soil stacks, vent stacks, horizontal branches, traps, and connections
to fixtures and drains.
Underground building drain piping including mains, branches, traps,
connections to fixtures and drains, connections to stacks, terminating
at connection to sanitary sewers 10' outside inner face of foundation
wall.
Exterior sanitary sewer system from building piping termination to
municipal sewer connection.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of the locak
plumbing code pertaim ng to plumbing materials, construction and
installation of products.
PRODUCTS
SOIL AND WASTE PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS:
Above Ground Piping Within Buildings: Provide service weight hubless
cast-iron soil pipe, with u ess cast-iron soil pipe fittings and no -
hub joints.
Underground Building Piping: Provide standard weight polyvinyl
chloride sewer pipe witF solvent weld PVC sewer pipe fittings.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION OF BUILDING DRAIN AND EXTERIOR DRAIN PIPING:
General: Install underground building drains and project exterior
waste piping as indicated and in accordance with local plumbing code.
Lay underground building drains beginning at low point of systems, true
to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert.
Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets in
accordance with mfr's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements,
and other special installation requirements. Clean interior of piping
of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses.
SOIL AND WASTE PIPING SYSTEMS 15HO-1
Install soil and vent piping pitched to drain at minimum slope of 1/ 4"
per foot (2%) for piping 3" and smaller, and 1/8" per foot (1%) for
piping 4" and larger.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide soil and waste piping runouts to
plumbing fixtures and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated;
but in no case smaller than required by plumbing code.
Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab
supporting fixtures or drains.
END OF SECTION
SOIL AND WASTE PIPING SYSTEMS 15HO-2
SECTION 15I0
H I
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Type of equipment for this project include the following:
Heat -pump Heating/Cooling Units.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
UL Compliance: Provide devices electrical components which have been
-� listed an a eled by Underwriters Laboratories.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit mfr's specifications, including rated capacities,
and —i-nstal ation instructions.
Wiring Diagrams: Submit product wiring diagrams clearly indicating all
require field —electrical connections, to include connections between
different pieces of equipment.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for each piece of equipment.
PRODUCTS
HEAT -PUMP HEATING/COOLING UNIT:
-" General: Provide factory -assembled and tested air-to-air heat -pump
.uni s as indicated, consisting of fans, compressors, coils, auxiliary
heat elements, temperature controls, filters, and dampers. Provide
.., capacities and electrical characteristics as scheduled.
Interior Fan: Provide forward -curved centrifugal, belt -driven fans
� with adjustable sheaves and permanently lubricated motor bearings.
Compressors: Provide welded, fully hermetic units with crankcase
heaters, vibration isolators, tested to operate at -20 deg. F (on
heating cycle) without shutting off or 45 deg. F (on cooling cycle).
provide with 5 year warranty.
Coils: Indoor and outdoor coils shall be non-ferrous construction with
a uminum fins (mechanically bonded) to copper tubes, and all joints
brazed. Coils of same mfr. as remainder of unit.
Auxiliary Heat Element: Provide with open nicrome heaters with all
necessary operating and safety controls.
HEATING/COOLING UNITS 15I0-1
Unit Cabinet: Provide galv. steel., bonderized and coated with baked
enamel finish. Cabinet interior shall be insulated with 1" thick
neoprene -coated fiberglass. Panels shall be easily removable for
service. Provide condensate drain for indoor coil. Secure panels with
"Crimp-tite" screws.
Electrical Connection: Provide unit with single -point electrical
connection. Exception: 5 ton units and below may have dual electrical
connections (base unit and also auxiliary heaters).
Economizer Control: Provide economizer control which shall be capable
of introducing 0% outside air. System shall include OA and RA
dampers, control system and OA thermostat. The control changeover
shall be fully automatic through adjustable outdoor air thermostat.
Economizer shall be capable of simultaneous compressor and economizer
operation.
Smoke Detector: Provide mfr's standard construction photo -electric
duct -type smoke detector. Provide Simples 2098-9537 housing, 2098-
9646 detector assembly, and 2098-9771 sampling tubes, or approved
equal. Provide detector with auxiliary contacts. Smoke detector shall
report to firm alarm panel (if one is available). Provide Simplex
2098-9787 (or approved equal) remote test switch. Provide engraved
label for switch which reads "RTU1, RTU2", etc. Provide all relays
necessary to result in a finished system.
Safety Controls: Provide high and low pressure stats, loss of charge
protection, current and temperature sensitive overload devices.
Defrost Control: Provide control system incorporated into base unit to
prevent rost accumulation during heating cycle. Defrost cycle shall
function based on time and coil temperature. A 90 min. timer shall
initiate defrost operation only if coil temperature is low enough to
indicate frost condition. Defrost shall have a positive termination
time of a maximum of 10 min. or when defrost thermostat is satisfied.
Aux. heaters shall operate automatically during defrost cycle.
Short -Cycle Control: Provide controls to prevent short cycling of
compressors.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION OF UNITS:
Inspection: Examine areas and conditions under which heating and
cooling units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to
the Installer.
General: Install units in accordance with mfr's installation
instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in
locations indicated, and maintain mfr's recommended clearances.
HEATING/COOLING UNITS 15I0-2
Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by mfr. but
not specified to be factory -mounted. Furnish copy of mfr's wiring
diagram submittal to electrical contractor.
�* Ductwork: Connect supply and return ducts to unit with flexible duct
connections. Provide transitions to exactly match unit duct connection
sizes.
Start-up: Start-up units in accordance with mfr's start-up procedures.
lest controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace
damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Install smoke detector in SA ductwork in accordance with mfr's
recommendations. Install manual test switch at locations designated by
r Engineer. Detector shall shut -down unit and shall report to fire alarm
system (where appropriate) any time it detects smoke in the ductwork.
Install required relays at location designated by the Engineer.
Prior to start-up, all equipment shall be cleaned, belts adjusted and
air filter installed. Safety and operating controls shall be adjusted
as necessary to place them in proper operation and sequence.
Start-up equipment in accordance with mfr's start-up instructions.
Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Heating
safety controls shall be checked in accordance with the mfr's
instructions. Satisfactory operation of all heat -regulation controls
and safety controls shall be demonstrated.
All deficiencies discovered in the course of performance testing shall
be corrected on site, if possible, or the defective
device/component/equipment shall be replaced and a new item installed.
Testing shall resume with equipment repair or replacement.
END OF SECTION
HEATING/COOLING UNITS
15I0-3
SECTION 15KO
PLUMBING FIXTURES
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Provide and install plumbing fixtures as indicated and as specified.
Provide complete units with all necessary components.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Plumbing Fixture Standards: Comply with applicable portions of local
plumbing code pertaining to materials and installation of plumbing
fixtures.
ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to
plumbing fixtures and systems, and bath tub units.
Comply with ANSI A 171.1 standard pertaining to plumbing fixtures
for the handicapped.
PDI Compliance: Comply with standards established by Plumbing and
rainage nstitute pertaining to plumbing fixture supports.
UL Labels: Provide water coolers which have been listed and labeled by
n erwri er's Laboratories.
ARI Labels: Provide water coolers which are rated and certified in
accordance with applicable Air -Conditions and Refrigeration Institute
standards.
SIIRMiTTAI C
Product Data: Submit mfr's specifications for plumbing fixtures and
trim, inc u ing catalog cut of each fixture type and trim time
furnished, rough -in dimensioned drawings, templates for cutting
substrates, fixture carrier, and installation instructions.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each
fixture type and trim item, including instructions for care of
finishes. Include this data in maintenance manual.
PRODUCTS
PLUMBING FIXTURES:
General: Provide factory -fabricated fixtures of type, style and
ma eria indicated. For each type fixture, provide fixture mfr's
standard trim, carrier, seats, and valves as indicated by their
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 15KO-1
published product information; either as designed and constructed, or
as recommended by the mfr., and as required for a complete
installation. Where type is not otherwise indicated, provide fixtures
complying with governing regulations.
Water Outlets: At locations where is supplied (by manual, automatic or
remote control), provide commercial quality faucets, valves, or
dispensing devices, of type and size indicated, and as required to
operate as indicated. Include manual shut-off valves and connection
stem pipes to permit outlet servicing without shut -down of water supply
piping system.
Vacuum Breakers: Provide with flush valves where required by governing
regulations, including locations where water outlets are equipped for
hose attachment.
P-traps: Include removable P-traps where drains are indicated for
direct connection to drainage system.
Carriers: Provide cast-iron supports for fixtures of either graphitic
gray iron, ductile iron, or malleable iron as indicated.
Fixture Bolt Caps: Provide mfr's standard exposed fixture bolt caps
finished to match ixture finish.
Escutcheons: Where fixture supplies and drains penetrate walls in
exposed locations, provide chrome plated cast -brass escutcheons with
set screw.
Aerators: Provide aerators of types approved by Health Departments
having jurisdiction.
PLUMBING FIXTURES:
T. Shower: Provide flange (cast integral to floor), stainless steel drain
ob�c`y.-- Provide metal -handles, single -lever faucet with chrome plated
shower head. Provide faucet with screw -driver stops.
Fixture: Fiat MFT, 36" x 36".
auce : Alkay LK-5620.
-- Lavatory: Counter -mounted, 20" x 17" self -rimming, enameled cast-iron
oval. Provide w/chromed brass single control lavatory fitting, 3/8"
lavatory wall supplies with wall flange and wheel handle, chrome plate
p-trap with cleanout, and grid strainer with offset tailpiece. Comply
with handicapped requirements.
Fixture: Eljer 052-0274
Faucet: Eljer 557-1120
aRpiece: Eljer 803-0530
Urinal: Wall -mounted, vitreous, washout with exposed flush valve.
rove e with carries and removable beehive strainer.
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 15KO-2
Fixture: Eljer 161-1030
F T sfi-Valve: Sloan Royal 186.
Water Closet (Floor -mounted, Valve -type, Handicapped): Floor -mounted,
siphon jet, elongated, vitreous china closet bowl with exposed flush
valve. provide with flat bolt covers, and open -front white plastic
seat without lid, handicapped height (18").
Fixture: Eljer 111-1245
Flush Valve: Sloan Royal 110-3
EXECUTION
INSPECTION AND PREPARATION:
Install plumbing fixtures of types indicated where shown and at
indicated heights; in accordance with fixture mfr's written
instructions, roughing -in drawings, and with recognized industry
practices. ensure that plumbing fixtures comply with requirements and
serve intended purposes. Comply with applicable requirements of the
National Standard Plumbing Code pertaining to installation of plumbing
fixtures.
CLEAN AND PROTECT:
Clean plumbing fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of
installation. Protect installed fixtures from damage during the
remainder of construction period.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
Upon completion of installation of plumbing fixtures and after units
are water pressurized, test fixtures to demonstrate capability and
compliance with requirements. When possible, correct malfunctioning
units at site, then re -test to demonstrate compliance; otherwise,
remove and replace with new units and proceed with re -testing.
Inspect each installed unit for damage to finish. If feasible, restore
and match finish to original at site; otherwise, remove fixture and
replace with new unit. Feasibility and match to be judged by
Architect/Engineer. Remove cracked or dented units and replace with
new units.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 15KO-3
SECTION 15LO
AUTOMATIC TEMP
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Furnish and install automatic temperature control systems specified
below and consisting of the following:
Temperature Control System: This system includes thermostats
supplied y the equipment mfr.
Smoke Control System: This system consists of smoke detectors and
associated re ay switches.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
UL Compliance: Provide devices electrical components which have been
listed anT raFeled by Underwriters Laboratories.
Provide all devices by single mfr.
Supplier to check all specified control elements for compatibility
with submitted equipment and shall certify that all control
components will satisfy operations requirements with the submitted
equipment.
SHRMTTTAI S
Product Data: Submit mfr's specifications, including installation
instructions.
Wiring Diagrams: Submit product wiring diagrams clearly indicating all
required fieldelectrical connections, to include connections between
different pieces of equipment.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for each piece of equipment.
Include all above data in maintenance manual.
PRODUCTS
TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM:
Factory -Supplied Thermostats: On indicated systems, provide with
su ase having auto/heat/cool mode -selector switch and auto/on fan -
selector switch. Provide Honeywell or approved equal.
SMOKE CONTROL SYSTEM:
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 15LO-1
This system shall have the capability of sensing smoke at the HVAC unit
and shutting down that specific system. The system shall consist of
smoke detectors and associated relay switches. See Section 15I0 for
information on smoke detector. This detector upon sensing a smoke
condition shall close its control contactor which in turn applies power
to the normally closed smoke -relay.
Smoke Relay: provide relay, which shall upon energizing, open its
normally closed contacts, thereby breaking the power circuit to the
thermostat, which shall in turn shut down the HVAC unit. provide
auxiliary contacts in smoke detector to report to fire alarm panel and
to illuminate an indicating light. Position light in HVAC unit
housing, adjacent relay to indicate that is being energized.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION OF CONTROL DEVICES:
Inspection: Examine areas and conditions under which control devices
are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Owner.
General: Install control devices in accordance with mfr's installation
instructions. Install units firmly anchored in locations indicated.
Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by mfr-
Furnish copy of mfr's wiring diagram submittal to electrical
contractor.
Temperature Control System: Install thermostat on indicated wall,
approximately where possible, re -use existing in -wall
conduit, pulling new conductors. Where no conduit is in place, low
voltage wiring may be routed in stud space of stud -and -gyp. walls.
Where no stud wall is convenient to the desired location, route
conductors in Wiremold (or equal) surface -mounted conduit. Paint all
surface -mounted conduit to match wall, submit proposed
color/location/routing to Engineer for approval.
Night -Shutdown Control System: Install all system components so that
night shutdown system does not prevent high temperature control devices
(which -keep the unit from shutting down with its heat exchangers too
warm) from functioning correctly.
Low Temperature -Override Thermostat: Position in corridor adjacent
electrical room. Provide engraved label for thermostat.
Route control conductors (from main -relay to each secondary relay) with
dust -control conductors in same conduit. Route through ceiling space.
Provide junction box at HVAC Unit and branch off appropriate control
conductor to secondary relays in unit. Route control conductors within
flex conduit inside HVAC housing, terminate at junction box positioned
adjacent secondary relays.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 15LO-2
Color code night shutdown conductor as black and white -with -black
stripes (neutral ).
Smoke Control System: Install smoke detector as instructed in Section
15I0 of these specifications.
Position smoke relay in HVAC unit housing and either paint cover red or
provide engraved label reading "Smoke".
Route control conductors (from main -relay to each smoke relay) within
flex conduit inside HVAC unit housing, terminate at junction box
positioned adjacent smoke relay.
Color code smoke -control conductor as red and white -with -red stripes
^� (neutral).
Test Controls:- Test controls and demonstrate compliance with
requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
All deficiencies discovered in the course of performance testing shall
be corrected on site, if possible, or the defective
device/component/equipment shall be replaced and a new item installed.
Testing shall resume with equipment repair or replacement.
END OF SECTION
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 15LO-3
SECTION 15MO
POWER VENTILTTORS
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Types of equipment required for this project include the following:
Exhaust fans.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
UL Compliance: Provide devices electrical components which have been
listed an a eled by Underwriters Laboratories.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit mfr's specifications, including rated capacities,
and insta on instructions.
Wiring Diagrams: Submit product wiring diagrams clearly indicating all
required fieldelectrical connections, to include connections between
different pieces of equipment.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for each piece of equipment.
PRODUCTS
EXHAUST FANS:
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard pre -
a rica ed power ventilator units of type and size indicated, modified
as necessary to comply with requirements and as required for complete
installation.
Control Switches: Unless specifically instructed otherwise, provide
each ex aunt an with factory -supplied variable speed control switch.
Where motor size or electrical characteristics preclude variable speed
operation, provide manual motor starter for operation control (this is
in addition to the manual motor starters specified for motor isolation.
Coordinate exact location of control switches with Engineer prior to
installation.
Centrifugal Roof Ventilators: Provide permanent split -capacitor type
motor for direct drivenfans; capacitor -start, induction -run type motor
for belt driven fans.
Electrical: Provide non -fusible type disconnect switch at motor
adjacent to the fan housing. Provide thermal overload protection in
fan motor.
POWER VENTILATORS 15MO-1
,., Bird Screens: Provide removable bird screens, 1/ 2" mesh, 16 ga.
aluminum -6rass wire.
Dampers: Provide motor -operated opposed blade dampers with linkage in
curb base. Dampers shall cycle open any time the motor is running.
rvr/`1ITT llKl
INSTALLATION OF EXHAUST FANS:
General: Except as otherwise indicated or specified, install
,�. ven i ators in accordance with mfr's installation instructions and
recognized industry practices to insure that ventilators serve their
intended function.
Coordinate ventilator work with work of roofing, walls, and ceilings,
as necessary for proper interfacing.
Ensure that power ventilators are wired properly, with correct motor
rotation, and positive electrical motor grounding.
Remove shipping bolts and temporary supports within ventilators.
Adjust dampers for free operation. On all pitched roofs and elsewhere
as specified, paint exhaust fan to match roof.
START-UP:
Prior to start-up, all equipment shall be cleaned, belts adjusted and
air filter installed. Start-up equipment in accordance with mfr's
start-up instructions.
All deficiencies discovered in the course of performance testing shall
be corrected on site, if possible, or the defective
device/component/equipment shall be replaced and new item installed.
Testing shall resume with equipment repair or replacement.
END OF SECTION
POWER VENTILATORS 15MO-2
SECTION 1500
LOW PRESSURE DUC
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK:
Type of low pressure ductwork required for this project include the
following:
Cooling/heating supply and return air system.
Mechanical exhaust system.
Ductwork components specified herein include the following:
Ductwork materials
Duct accessories,
Outlets and Inlets.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA "Low Pressure Ductwork
onstruction Standard" for fabrication and installation of low pressure
ductwork.
NFPA Compliance: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 90A "Standard for the
Installation ot Ait Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and ANSI/ NFPA
90B "Standard _for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air -
Conditioning Systems".
Comply with NFPA 96 "Cooking Equipment, Vapor Removal".
UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance
with n erwriters Laboratories (UL) Standard 555 "Fire Dampers and
Ceiling Dampers".
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit mfr's specifications on mfrd products and
ac ory- a ricated ductwork and duct accessories.
Submit product data on fire dampers.
Submit mfr's data on outlets and inlets.
Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of
installed ductwork, duct accessories, and outlets and inlets.
PRODUCTS
DUCTWORK MATERIAL:
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK 1500-1
Exposed Ductwork Material: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed
o view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from
visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, oil
canning, stains and discolorations and other imperfections, including
those which would impair painting.
Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from
galy. sheet steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A 527, lockforming quality,
with ANSI/ASTM A 525, G90 zinc coating; mill phosphatized for exposed
locations.
Flexible Duct: Provide factory -made insulated flexible round air duct
with rein orced metalized mylar outer jacket enclosing a 1 1/2" thick
fiber glass insulation wrapped around a continuous inner air barrier of
double layer polyester, reinforced with an encapsulated steel wire
helix. Provide duct with integral hanger support, encapsulated in the
middle of the jacket tab. All flexible duct shall be classified as a
type 1 duct. Provide Certainteed Certaflex 7 or Certaflex 25 with
punchline tab, or approved equal.
MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS:
Duct Sealant: Non -hardening, non -migrating mastic or liquid elastic
sealant type applicable for fabrication/installation detail) as
compounded and recommended by mfr. specifically for sealing joints and
seams of ductwork.
Duct Tape: Use Arno C-520, or approved equal, 2" wide duct tape for
7-- making duct -to -duct or end connections for round flexible duct.
P_
Duct Clamps: Use Panduit PLT-H, or approved equal, banding strap for
TT—exible duct connections.
Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide
ot-dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and
angles for support of ductwork. For exposed stainless steel ductwork,
provide matching stainless steel support materials.
Round Duct Tap: Where specified, provide a round duct tap complete
with scoop and manual butterfly balancing damper.
Duct -Connection System: Provide slide -on duct -connection system,
uc mate or approved equal. Provide system with roll -formed
"angles" (with integral mastic sealant built into angle), "corners"
(for insertion into hollow web of ductmate angle), PVC connection
cleats, extruded butyl gasket.
METAL DUCTWORK FABRICATION:
DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS ARE NET OPEN AREA. See Division 15
sections "Mechanical Insulation" for information on thickness of duct
liner (if any).
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK 1500-2
Shop fabricate ductwork in 4, 8, 10 or 12 foot lengths, unless
otherwise indicated or required to complete runs.
Shop fabricate ductwork of gages and reinforcement complying with
SMACNA "Low Pressure Duct Standards - 5th Edition".
Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with
duct requirements as applicable to fittings. Limit angular tapers to
30 degrees for contracting tapers and 20 degrees for expanding tapes.
Make square elbows having 4 gores (90 deg.) or 2 gores (45 deg.) as
appropriate.
DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS:
Provide the following type duct system for each specific duct system:
Cooling/Heating Supply/Return: Line galv. steel duct.
Toilet Exhaust: Lined galv. duct.
Grille taps (only where noted): Flexible duct.
DUCT ACCESSORIES:
Low Pressure Manual Dampers: Provide dampers of single blade type or
multiblade type, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "Low Pressure
Duct Standards.
Wall -Type Fire Dampers: Provide fir dampers, of types and sizes
indicated. Cons ruct casings of 11 ga. galv. steel with 160-165 deg. F
(71-74 Deg. C) unless otherwise indicated. Provide damper with
positive lock in closed position, and with the following additional
features:
Damper Blade Assembly: Curtain type.
bladeMaterial: Steel, match casing.
AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES:
General: Provide mfr's standard ceiling/wall/floor/duct air
its r�ibution devices where shown; or size, shape capacity and type
indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as
required for complete installation.
SubStrata Compatibility: Provide diffusers/grilles/registers with
border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling/wall/floor
systems. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for
types of ceiling/wall/floor systems which will contain each type of air
distribution devices.
Types: Provide devices of type, capacity and with accessories and
i�inis� h s as listed on Air Distribution Schedule. The following
requirements shall apply unless noted otherwise.
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK 1500-3
Diffuser Faces: Provide square housing, core of square concentric
louvers, square or round duct connection (provide round duct
connection only where round duct called for on the drawings).
Provide all louver face grilles as "full-faced".
Return Air Grilles: Provide perforated panel with square frame.
Diffuser Mountings: Provide diffusers with flush perimeter flange
and gasket to seal against ceiling or provide diffuser housing
sized to fit between ceiling exposed suspension tee bars and rest
on top surface of tee- bar.
Diffuser Patterns: Provide adjustable louver face for 4 direction
air flow unless specified otherwise.
Slot Diffusers: Where specified, provide adjustable linear slot
diffuse constructed of extruded alum. Provide with natural
anodized finish, air patter controller, individually -adjustable
volume controllers, and section alignment keyways. provide trim
arrangement as necessary for the ceiling surface. Coordinate with
ceiling Installer.
Insulated -Slot Diffuser Plenum: Provide factory -made 24 gage
ga v. steel diffuser plenum wit 1" x 1 1/2 lb. density glass
fiber thermal and acoustic lining. Provide plenum with adjustable
inlet damper.
Supply/Exhaust Dampers: Provide adjustable opposed blade damper
assembly, key operate from face of diffuser/grille on all supply
-- and exhaust diffuser or grilles unless specified otherwise.
Diffuse Accessories: Provide curved blade extractor mounted on
adjustable rame to product air scooping action in duct at
diffuser take -off. Provide tools designed to fit through diffuser
face and operate volume control device and/or pattern adjustment.
Diffuser Finishes: Provide semi -gloss white enamel prime finish
unless specs ie otherwise.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION OF ABOVE -GRADE DUCTWORK:
Gene`ral: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized
industry practices which will achieve air tight (5% leakage) and
noiseless (no objectional noise) systems, capable of performing each
indicated service. Install each run with minimum of joints. Align
ductwork accurately at connection, within 1/ 8" misalignment tolerance
and with internal surfaces smooth.
., Seal ductwork, after installation, to seal class recommended, and
method prescribed in SMACNA "Low Pressure Ductwork Standards - 5th
Edition".
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK 1500-4
Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop -
fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements.
Locate ductwork runs vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal
runs wherever possible.
Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other
structural and permanent -enclosure elements of building. Limit
clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment
of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible,
locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation.
Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork
from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction
or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid
partitions, except as specifically shown.
Coordinate layout with lighting layouts and similar finished work.
Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls,
conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct -plus -
insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap
opening on 4 sides by at least 1 1/ 2".
Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories,
dampers, coil frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of
ductwork system.
INSTALLATION OF ABOVE -GRADE DUCT SUPPORTS:
Support ductwork in manner complying with SMACNA "Low Pressure Duct
Standards - 5th Edition" hangers and supports section.
Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors
of type which will hold ducts true -to -shape and to prevent buckling.
Install hangers close to transverse joints of main ducts and branches,
clinch collar branch connections and the first branch elbows after
nested splits.
Locate hangers of ducts penetrating wall (or partitions) as though the
walls will contribute no support to the duct.
Install hangers in pairs on exact opposite sides of duct.
Maintain hanger spacing intervals less than or equal to the specified
maximums.
Install hangers at the midpoint of small ad medium size horizontal
vaned square elbows. On wide vaned square elbows, install additional
hangers at maximum allowed intervals measured along the heel lines of
the elbows.
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK 1500-5
Provide at least one set of hangers for short branches 3' or less in
length. Provide one or more sets of hangers for equipment in duct runs
as recommended by the mfr.
Locate duct hangers approximately:
2-24 inches from flexible connectors, 12 - 36 inches from main
duct to first hanger of long branch ducts.
2 - 12 inches from ends of all branch ducts.
2 - 24 inches from fire damper breakaway joints, 6 - 12 inches
from transverse joints of ducts whose lengths are the same as
specified hanger intervals.
6 - 12 inches from one side of walls or partitions penetrated by
-' ducts.
Space hangers approximately:
Ducts with areas up to 4 sq. ft. may have their hangers spaced up
to 8 ft. apart.
Ducts with areas 4.1 to 10 sq. ft. may have their hangers spaced
not more than 6 ft. apart.
Ducts with areas over 10 sq. ft. may have their hangers located up
to 4 ft. apart.
,.., INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCT:
Supporting Duct: Hang the duct using integral punchline tab and 12
gage wire. Using standard hole punch, punch holes in tab approximately
30" o.c. (60" max. spacing). Prior to punching tab, install a strip of
duct tape along the tab for reinforcement. Punch hole below cord built
into tab. Support so that maximum sag of 5" per 10' will occur.
Bending Duct: Do not make bends in duct greater than 45 deg. (For
direction cTianges in excess of 45 deg., use round sheet metal elbow.)
Minimum bending radius 1/ 2 the duct diameter.
Do not compress duct during installation, using only that length
necessary for the installation.
Tap -in Connection: Roll back outer jacket and insulation and
approximately 7 ',exposing inner air barrier core. Slide core over
r. tap -in collar a min. of 2". Tape core to collar with two wraps of 2
wide duct tape, rubbing each wrap with sufficient pressure to activate
pressure sensitive adhesive. Pull insulation and outer jacket over the
inner core seal and tape outer jacket to collar with two wraps of 2"
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK 1500-6
wide duct tape, wrapping in a helical fashion. Install metal clamping
and or Panduit PLT-H strap over taped joint. Install band far enough
ack to clamp both outer jacket and inner core. Tighten band snugly
using Panduit tension/cutoff tool #GS4H-120; hand -tightening is not
acceptable.
INSTALLATION OF DUCT HARDWARE:
Extractor: Install regulator so that it is accessible from ceiling
space. Install regulator opposite specified end bearing (if duct in
excess of 8" in width, measured parallel with the regulator rod.
Position regulator so that full range of extractor is available.
Install components air tight.
Splitter: Install splitter regulator so that full damper adjustment is
possi e.
INSTALLATION OF OUTLETS AND INLETS:
General: Install outlets and inlets in accordance with mfr's written
instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to
ensure that products serve intended functions.
Coordination with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories,
as necessary to interface installation of outlets and inlets with other
work.
Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on
general construction "Reflected Ceilings Plans". Unless otherwise
indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceilings modules.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
Clean ductwork internally, unit -by -unit as it is installed, of dust and
debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might
cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be
painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration.
Strip protective paper from stainless ductwork surfaces, and repair
finish wherever it has been damaged.
Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to
equipment or air distribution devices at time of ductwork installation,
provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which
will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to
be completed.
END OF SECTION
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK 1500-7
SECTION 16BO
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND MEIHODS
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Items discussed includes, but is not limited to, the following:
Raceways; conductors; boxes and fittings; taps and splices.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards
pertaining to raceways and with ANSI C 134.1 (NEMA Standards Pub. No.
OS 1) as applicable to sheet -steel outlet boxes, devices boxes, covers
and box supports.
UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with provisions of UL safety
standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems, wire, cable,
connectors, boxes and fittings and provide all items UL-listed and
labeled.
�., NEC Compliance: Comply with requirements as applicable to construction
and ins a a ion of raceway systems, electrical wire, cable,
connectors, boxes and fittings.
CIIRMTTTAI C
Product Data: Submit mfr's data including specifications, installation
instructions and general recommendations, for each device or component
required. This includes raceways, conductors, connectors, boxes, etc.
Connectors: Submit mfr's code scheme for matching compression
connector die.
PRODUCTS
Metal Conduit and Tubing: Provide metal conduit as indicated.
Rigid Steel Conduit: FS WW-C-0581 and ANSI C80.1.
Rigid Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-408.
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): FS WW-C-563 and ANSI C80.3.
EMT Fittings: FS W-F-408. Provide only compression -type
fittings; set -screw" fittings will not be acceptable.
Flexible Metal Conduit: FS WW-C-566, Type 2: Zinc -coated steel.
Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-406, Type 1, Class 1, and
y e .
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16BO-1
Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide liquid -tight
flexible metal conduit; construct of single strip, flexible,
continuous, interlocked, and double -wrapped steel; galvanized
inside and outside; coat with liquid -tight jacket of flexible
polyvinyl chloride (PVC).
Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-406, Type 1,
Class 3, Style 6.
Metal Surface Raceway: Comply with Fed. Spec. W-C-582 and UL.
Provide UL listedand labeled components and devices. All metal
surface raceway shall be Wiremold, or approved equal.
NON-METALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS:
General: Provide heavy wall rigid non-metallic conduit as mfrd by
ar on. Provide schedule 40, 90 deg. C., UL listed PVC.
Underground PVC Plastic Utilities Duct: ANSI/NEMA TC 6, Type 1 for
encased burialin concrete, Type 11 for direct burial.
PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct Fittings: ANSI/ NEMA TC 9, match to
duct type and material.
WIRE AND CABLE:
General: Provide wire, cable and connectors of mfr's standard
ma eria s, as indicated by published product information; designed and
constructed as recommended by mfr., and as required for the
installation.
Provide factory -fabricated wire of sizes, ratings, materials and types
indicated for each services.
UL Type: THHN
UL-Type: THW
Rate al : Copper.
Conductors: Solid (AWG 20 to AWG 8 only).
on uctors: Concentric -lay -stranded (standard flexibility).
Outer Gov ring: Thermoplastic.
CONNECTORS:
Provide UL-listed and labeled components and devices.
Crimp -type Compression Connectors (all copper conductors No. 8 AWG and
arger): PProvide high conductivity copper crimp -type; Dsco
series for straight splices or "AH" series for tap splices, or approved
equal. comply with UL486. Provide color -coded between connector and
die.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16BO-2
Twist -On Connectors (all copper conductors No. 18 thru No. 10 AWG:
Provide wist-on wire joints at outlet ox taps, 1homas 5 Betts series
"PT" or approved equal.
Heat Shrinkable Tubing: Provide heavy-duty protective covering, rated
or 600 volts, 90 deg. C, designed for 3:1 shrink ratio. Provide STeel
City Type "HS" or approved equal.
FABRICATED BOXES:
Interior Outlet Boxes: Provide galv. flat rolled sheet steel interior
outlet wiring boxes, of types, shapes and sizes, including box depths,
to suit each respective location and installation; construct with
stamped knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded screw holes with
corrosion -resistant screws for securing box covers and wiring devices.
Interior Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories
as required for each insta ation, including mounting brackets,
wallboard hangers, extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps
and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are compatible
" with outlet boxes being used and fulfilling requirements for
individual wiring situations. Choice of accessories is
Installer's option.
Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code -gage sheet steel
junction and pull oxes, with screw -on covers; of types, shapes and
sizes, to suit each respective location and installation; with welded
seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and
washers.
Conduit Outlet Bodies and Cast Device Boxes: Provide galv. cast -metal
conduit o ies, of types, shapes an sizes, to suit respective
locations and installation, construct with threaded -conduit -entrance
ends, removable covers, cover gaskets, and corrosion -resistant screws.
provide Appleton or approved equal.
Bushings, Knockout Closures, and Locknuts: Provide corrosion -resistant
punched steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable
iron conduit bushings, offset connector, of types and sizes to suit
respective uses and installation.
FLOOR OUTLET BOXES:
Provide cast iron floor box complying with Fed Spec W-C-583b and UL
standard 514. Provide UL-listed and labeled. Provide Hubbell #B-4333
three gang fully adjustable floor box or approved equal.
EXECUTION:
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS: Install electrical raceways where
�. indicated; in accordance with mfr's written instructions, applicable
requirements of NEC and NECA "Standard of Installation", and complying
with recognized industry practices.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16BO-3
All conduit shall be run in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. When
requested by the Owner or Engineer, a complete conduit system layout
shall be submitted for approval for each floor or section under
construction before permanent support or location is made.
All conduit shall be installed as a complete system without wires and
shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and from fitting to fitting.
A run of conduit rom between outlet and outlet or between outlet and
fitting shall not contain more than the equivalent of four 90 deg.
bends, including those bends located immediately at the outlet or
fitting.
No feeder conduit shall be longer than 80 feet between junction boxes
or cabinets unless there are no direction changes and only a straight
in -line pull of wire is required. In such straight -in -line runs the
distance between cabinets or boxes may be increased to 100 feet.
Coat underfloor metal raceways with bitumastic type protective coating
prior to placing concrete.
Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting
installation of cables/wires within raceways.
Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide only above suspended ceilings and only
or lighting fixture 'whips".
Liquid -tight Flexible Conduit: Provide for motor connections, and for
other electrical equipment connections where subject to movement and
vibration.
Conduit used as "Ground" Path: This electrical installation shall
consist ot a complete green -wire ground system, i.e. each electrical
device shall be grounded with a separate ground wire and shall not rely
on the conduit system for ground path. In no way does this release the
Contractor from complying with NEC requirements to install all conduits
completely grounded.
SPECIAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS:
Telephone Conduit:
General: Provide all telephone conduit with pull wire.
Telephone Outlet Conduit: Provide 3/ 4" EMT conduit for indicated
con uit runs.Extend— from telephone outlet locations (consiting of
standard receptacle j-box located 12" AFF) to attic space and terminate
at that point.
HVAC Control Conduit: All HVAC Control conduit shall be run in EMT
conduit, unless specifically stated otherise. No exposed wiring shall
be allowed.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16BO-4
r-
Thermostat Conduit: Provide standard junction box (60" AFF. typical)
an conduit from thermostat location to controlled equipment.
^ Electrical Service Conduits: Provide rigid steel conduits above -grade.
Attach conduit to pole using uni-strut bracket and pipe clamps. Attach
bracket to pole with U-bolts adequately sized to reach around the pole.
Provide weatherhead 15' above finished grade (or as directed by Owner).
INSTALLATION OF WIRE AND CABLE
General: Install electrical cables, wires and connectors as indicated,
in compliance with mfr's written instructions, applicable requirements
of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation and in accordance with
recognized industry practices.
Coordinate cable and wire installation work with electrical raceway and
equipment installation work, as necessary for proper interface.
Pull conductors together where more than one is being installed in a
raceway.
Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary; compound must not
deteriorate conductor or insulation.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable or rope which cannot
„^ damage raceway._
Keep conductor splices to minimum.
Install splices and tapes which have mechanical strength and insulation
rating equivalent or better than conductor.
Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor
material.
Color Coding: Provide conductors with colored insulation complying
with e o owing schedule:
120/ 240V System:
r-.
Phase A: Black
Phase B: Orange (high leg)
Phase C: Blue
Neutral: White or Gray
Ground: Green
Switch Leg: Black w/White, Blue w/White
277/480V System:
Phase A: Purple
Phase B: Brown
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16BO-5
Phase C: Yellow
Neutral: White or Gray
Ground: Green.
Switch Leg: Purple with White, Brown with White, Yellow with White.
ALL SERVICE, FEEDER AND BRANCH CONDUCTORS ARE TO BE SO CODED.
All wiring No. 8 and larger shall be black and shall be marked with
color banding tape as specified. All phase conductors, neutral and
equipment ground conductors shall each be marked with colored tape.
This tape marking shall be applied at the breakers, mains, and in all
wireway, pullbox, auxiliary gutter, junction box, motor terminal box
and transformer enclosure. In wireways and auxiliary gutters longer
than two feet, install tape marking every four feet of wiring in the
raceway.
Wiring Sizing: No conductor smaller than #12 shall be used. In the
case of #12 ome runs" over 75 feet in length re -size in accordance
with the following:
A. 75 to 125 ft: #10 AWG
B. 125 feet +: #8 AWG.
The sizing of all wire except remote control wire shall be accomplished
in the case of both feeder and branch circuits by conforming to the
following provisions:
A. 120/ 208V: 2.0% at max load with 90% power factor.
B. 277/48OV: 1.0% at max load with 90% power factor.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of
raceways; remove burrs, dirt and construction debris.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
Prior to energization, test cable and wire for continuity of circuitry,
and also for short circuits. Correct malfunctions when detected.
Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and
demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements.
APPLICATION:
Conduit:
Rigid Steel: Provide for all building service wiring all roof-
moun e conMit and/or where abuse might be expected.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16BO-6
Wmi
EMT: Provide for all building feeder and branch circuits.
Non -Metallic Conduit: Provide for all below -grade conduit, unless
�- otherwise indicated.
Conductors:
THW: Provide for all feeder circuits and otherwise as required by
=due to site conditions.
THHN: Provide for all branch circuitry, except where restricted
by NBC .
END OF SECTION
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16BO-7
NQQ
SECTION 16CO
WIRING I
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Types of electrical wiring devices in this section include the
following:
Receptacles
Switches
Wall plates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and
installation o electrical wiring devices.
UL Compliance and Labeling: Provide electrical wiring devices which
have been UL-listed and labeled.
NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards for general and specific
purpose wiring devices.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit mfr's data on electrical wiring devices.
PRODUCTS
FABRICATED WIRING DEVICES:
General: Provide factory -fabricated wiring devices, in types, colors,
and a ec rical rating s for applications indicated and complying with
NEMA Standards Pub. No. WD 1. Where types and grades are not
indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to
fulfill wiring requirements, and complying with NEC and NEMA Standards
for wiring devices.
Receptacles:
Specification -Grade Duplex or Simplex: Provide duplex or simplex
specification -grade type receptacles '
eceptac es, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding,
with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, ground terminals and
poles internally connected to mounting yoke, 20-amperes, 125
volts, with metal internally connected to mounting yoke, 20-
amperes, 125 volts, with metal plaster ears, side wiring NEMA
configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated. Provide all nylon
face and bodies, flat face with body color -coded for rating.
provide Leviton "Spec Master" model 5362 (duplex) and model 5361
(simplex) with limited ten-year warranty or approved equal.
WIRING DEVICES 16CO-1
Ground -Fault Circuit Interrupter Duplex: Provide duplex
receptacle having ee - roug an erminal capabilities to
interrupt the circuit when a fault to ground exceed the pre-
determined limit. Comply with UL 943, class A. Provide UL listed
as "Hospital -Grade". Provide with all nylon designer -style faces,
indicator light (showing the circuit is powered) and test switch.
Provide Leviton GFCI or approved equal.
Specification -Grade Simplex: Provide simplex specification grade type
receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, with green hexagonal equipment
ground screw, ground terminal internally connected to mounting yoke,
50-amperes, 250 volts, with metal plaster ears, side wiring NEMA
configuration 6-50R.
Hospital -Grade Isolated Ground Duplex or Simplex: Provide duplex or
simplex hospital -grade type receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding with
green hexagonal equipment ground screw, 20-amperes, 125 volts, with
metal plaster ears, side wiring NEMA configuration 5-20R unless
otherwise indicated. Provide UL-listed as "Hospital Grade" and as
"Isolated Ground". Provide all nylon face and bodies, flat orange -
colored face with body color -coded for rating, with mounting straps
fully insulated from grounding path created through metal boxes.
provide Leviton "Spec Master" model 5362-IG (duplex) and model 5361-IG
�., (simplex) with limited ten-year warranty or approved equal.
Switches:
Snap: Provide specification -grade flush single and double -pole
wl= o,-three and four way, toggle or key switches, 20- or 30-
amperes, 125/ 277 volt AC, quiet operation, green grounding screw,
with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equip with plaster
ears, switch handle, and back or side -wired screw terminals.
Provide with urea molded parts, color coded for rating. Provide
Leviton "Spec Master" with ten year limited warranty, model 1221
or approved equal.
WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES:
Lighting and Power Wall Plates: Provide single -switch, duplex or
simplex outlet wall plates for wiring devices, of types, sizes, and
�. with ganging and cut-outs as indicated. Construct with metal screws
for securing plates to devices; screw heads colored to match finish of
plates. Provide wall plates possessing the following additional
construction features:
Material and Finish: 0.04" thick, type 302 satin finished
stain ess steel.
Telephone Wall Plates: Provide similar to above except with
singe bushing out et. Similar to Hubbell ##SM2SS.
EXECUTION
WIRING DEVICES 16CO-2
INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES:
Install wiring devices as indicated, in compliance with mfr's written
instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of
Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to
fulfill project requirements.
Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical box and
wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices
with other work.
Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean and
free from excess building materials, dirt, and debris.
Delay installation of wiring devices until wiring work is completed.
Delay installation of wall plates until after painting work is
completed.
PROTECTION OF WALL PLATES AND RECEPTACLES:
Upon installation of wall plates and receptacles, advise Contractor
regarding proper and cautious use of convenience outlets. At time of
Substantial Completion, replace those items which have been damaged,
including those burned and scored by faulty plugs.
GROUNDING:
Provide electrically -continuous, tight grounding connections for wiring
devices, unless otherwise indicated.
TESTING:
Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring devices for electrical
continuity and proper polarity connections. After energizing
circuitry, test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with
requirements.
END OF SECTION
WIRING DEVICES 16CO-3
SECTION 16 DO
POWER DISTRIBUTION
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Types of power distribution components specified in this section
include the following:
Panelboards.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Special Use -Markings: Provide panelboards, constructed for special
use, with UE mar s indicating that special type usage.
UL Compliance: Comply with applicable UL safety standards pertaining
o panelboards and accessories, and enclosures; provide units which
have been UL-listed and labeled.
Comply with applicable requirements of UL 489, "Molded -Case Circuit
Breakers and Circuit -Breaker Enclosures". Provide overcurrent
protective devices which are UL-listed and labeled.
NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation of
pane oar s, ca inets, and cutout boxes.
CIIRMTTTAI S
•- Product Data: Submit mfr's data including specification, installation
ins ruc ions and general recommendations for each component required.
Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of panelboards and
enclosures Showing accurately scaled layouts of enclosures and required
individual panelboard devices, including but not necessarily limited
to, circuit breakers, fusible switches, fuses, ground -fault circuit
interrupters, and accessories.
PRODUCTS
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS:
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards,
enclosures and ancillary components, of types, sizes, and ratings
indicated, which comply with mfr's standard materials, design and
construction in accordance with published product information; equip
r- with number of unit panelboard devices as required for complete
installation. Where types, sizes, or ratings are not indicated, comply
with NEC, UL and established industry standards for applications
indicated.
POWER DISTRIBUTION 16DO-1
Interiors: All interiors shall be completely factory assembled. They
shall be so designed that switching and protective devices can be
replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing the
main bus connectors, so that circuits may be changed without machining,
drilling or tapping.
Branch circuits shall be arranged using double row construction except
when narrow column panels are indicated. A nameplate shall be provided
listing panel type and ratings.
Unless otherwise noted, full size insulated neutral bars shall be
included. Bus bar taps for panels with single pole branches shall be
arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Neutral
bussing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a
neutral connection. A ground bus will be included in all panels.
Boxes: Boxes shall be at least 20" wide made from galv. steel.
rT'rovide minimum gutter space in accordance with National Electric Code.
Where feeder cables supplying the mains of a panel are carried through
its box to supply other electrical equipment, the box shall be sized to
include the additionally required wiring space. At least four interior
mounting studs with adjustable nuts shall be provided.
No "load centers" will be accepted.
Trim: Switching device handles shall be accessible. Doors and
panelboard trims shall no uncover any live parts. Doors shall have
flush type cylinder lock and catch except doors over 48" in height
shall have auxiliary fasteners to and bottom of door in addition to the
flush type cylinder lock and catch. Panelboard switching devices with
individual dead front doors shall be acceptable in lieu of standard
door in trim design.
Panelboard trim clamps shall be of the indicating type.
Door hinges shall be concealed. All locks shall be keyed alike;
directory frame and card having a transparent cover shall be furnished
with each door.
The panelboard front shall provide door -and -door construction
consisting of hinged inner dead -front shield and a formed door over the
entire panelboard. The front shall be tamper resistant and shall not
be removable with the door locked.
All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the trim shall be properly
cleaned, primed with a rust inhibiting phosphatized coating, and
finished with a gray ANSI 61 paint. After installation, trim clamps
shall not be accessible when the panel door is closed and locked.
Conductors: All main bus bars shall be copper or aluminum, sized in
accordance with UL standards to limit the temperature rise on any
current carrying part to a maximum of 50 deg. C above an ambient
temperature of 40 deg. C maximum.
POWER DISTRIBUTION 16DO-2
P_
Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: Panels where shown for use at 240
vo ffs maximum snail e UL listedwi integrated assembly rating of 22K
AIC and shall be Square D, type NQOD or approved equal.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION OF SWITCHGEAR:
Install switchgear at location shown, outside the building. Ensure
that no storm drain discharges in the vicinity of the switchgear.
Concrete Pad: provide 7'(wide) x V(deep) x 4"(thick) concrete
pad for supporting the switchgear. Route service feeders from
r- transformer to switchgear below grade, entering switchgear from
below.
Provide engraved label at switchgear.
INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS:
General: Install panelboards and enclosures where indicated in
acc— orance with mfr's written instructions, applicable 'requirements of
NEC and NECA's " Standard of Installation", and in compliance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill
requirements.
Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with cable and
raceway installation work.
Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring
that they are permanently and mechanically secure.
Provide electrical connections within enclosures.
Fill out panel board's circuit directory cards upon completion of
installation work. Only type -written circuit directories will be
accepted.
Connect circuitry within panelboard in the same order as shown on the
panel schedule.
END OF SECTION
POWER DISTRIBUTION 16DO-3
SECTION 16EO
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Types of lighting fixtures in the section include the following:
High -intensity -discharge (HID), Fluorescent, Incandescent.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and
construction _oT building lighting fixtures.
Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Standard Pub. No. LE 1 and
LE 2 pertaining to lighting equipment.
ANSI/IES Compliance: Comply with ANSI 132.1 pertaining to lighting
fixtures.
UL Compliance: Provide interior lighting fixtures which have been UL-
is a an a eled.
CMB Labels: Provide fluorescent -lamp ballasts which comply with
Certified last Mfr. Association standards and carry the CMB label.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit mfr's data on lighting fixtures.
Shop Drawings: Submit fixtures shop drawings in booklet form with
separate s eet for each fixture, assembled in luminaire "type"
alphabetical order, with proposed fixture and accessories clearly
indicated on each sheet.
PRODUCTS
LIGHTING FIXTURES:
General: Provide lighting fixtures, of sizes, types and ratings
indicated; complete with, but not necessarily limited to housings,
lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, ballasts, starters, and wiring.
Fluorescent -Lamp Ballasts: Provide fluorescent -lamp ballasts, capable
ot operating lamp types indicated; with high power factor, rapid -start
and low -noise features; Type 1; Class P; sound -rated A, and with
internal thermal protection.
BUILDING LIGHTING 16EO-1
High -Intensity -Discharge -Lamp Ballasts: Provide HID lamp ballasts, of
ratings, types and makes as recommended by lamp mfr., which properly
matches lamps to power line by providing appropriate voltages and
impedances for which lamps are designed.
Emergency Ballasts: Provide equal to Bodine. Install in fixture or
have provided from factory. Arrange so that ballast has capability of
operating one 40A lamp for no less than 1 112 hr. Provide with
integral charger.
LIGHTING STANDARDS:
Provide metal raceway -type lighting poles and standards comprised of
shaft and bracket; equip with grounding connection readily accessible
from handhole and construct of galv. steel with bronze -colored finish.
Provide anchor base type with hand hole and cover. Design pole to
withstand 100 mph (with gust factor) winds as adjusted for height above
ground level. Provide ground rod at each pole.
Stack Lot Lighting: Provide 50' poles with two -fixtures per pole.
Vehicle Parking Lighting: Provide 30' poles with one fixture per pole,
except where specifically noted to have two lights per pole.
LIGHTING FIXTURES:
"FB" Spec grade wrap -around fluorescent fixture. Provide white enamel
end plates.
Mfr: Lithonia
a og Number: 2LB440-A-277-PRM
Watts: ZOOW
amps: 4-F40RST12CW
ol° u Ting: Surface
"FE" Spec grade recessed 2 x 2 troffer. Provide with opposing rotary -
action cam latches; door from hinged or latched from either side; frame
corners screwed together; gasket between door and frame; hinged and
latched wireway; pressure -lock lampholders; regressed aluminum frame.
Mfr: Lithonia
ata og Number: 2SP-2U40-rw-a12.125-277
Watts:
al—mps . 2-U40RST12CW
oFf unt1ng: T-bar.
"IC" Spec grade recessed incandescent "can" light, consisting of frame -
in module and trim assembly. Provide frame -in module with thermal
protection, factory -installed expandable bar hangers, aluminum socket
housing, retaining clips, j-box with snap -on covers, flex conduit
condition to socket housing. Trim assembly shall be eyeball -type.
BUILDING LIGHTING 16EO-2
Mfr.: Lithonia
ata og Number:
Watts:
a7- mps: 75R-30SP
ol�unting: T-bar.
EXECUTION
"LP" module w/"RE1" trim
INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES:
Install lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in
accordance with fixture mfr's written instructions, applicable
requirements of NEC, NECA's Standard of Installation", NEMA standards,
and with recognized industry practices .to ensure that lighting fixtures
fulfill requirements.
Coordinate with other electrical work as appropriate to properly
interface installation of interior lighting fixtures with other work.
Fasten fixtures securely to indicated structural support; and check to
ensure that solid pendant fixtures as plumb.
Emergency Ballasts: Provide factory -installed "emergency ballasts"
where possible. Frovide wiring arrangement so that lights (with
emergency ballasts) shown to be switched will activate ballasts only
during actual power outage.
ADJUST AND CLEAN:
Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of
installation.
Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction
period.
Contractor shall include in bid the cost to adjust the pole and/or
ground mounted fixture aiming point one time (within the first year)
after Owner takes possession of building.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures, and after
building circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to
demonstrate operation. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at
site, then re -test to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and
replace with new units, and proceed with re -testing.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT:
At time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in interior lighting
fixtures which are observed to be noticeably dimmed after Contractor's
use and testing, as judged by Architect/Engineer.
BUILDING LIGHTING 16EO-3
Furnish stock or replacement lamps amounting to 15% (but not less than
one lamp in each case) of each type and size lamp used in each type
fixture. Deliver replacement stock as directed to Owner's storage
space.
Provide tight equipment grounding connections for each interior
lighting fixture installation where indicated.
Provide ground rod at each pole -light.
END OF SECTION
BUILDING LIGHTING 16EO-4
(THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY)
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
-43-
(THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY)
�w
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
806-767-2167
February 15, 1991
Office of
Purchasing
Danny Klein Construction
Attn: Mr. Klein
4310 93rd Street
Lubbock, TX. 79423
RE: BID NO. 11049
Land Application Office Additions
Dear Mr. Klein:
Enclosed please find five contracts for the above
referenced bid. I ask that you please sign all five
contracts and return them with a payment bond, performance
bond and a certificate of insurance. Please return all
documents to our office as soon as possible.
If you have any questions, please do not hesitate to
call me at 806-767-2165.
Sincerely,
'4 '117
GENE EADS, C.P.M.
Purchasing Manager
GE/mf
Enclosures: 5 Contracts
(THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY)